ran signaling analysis guide(ran11.0_01)

251
RAN 11.0 Signalling Analysis Guide Issue 01 Date 2009-03-25 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Upload: benson-muchoki

Post on 28-Oct-2014

262 views

Category:

Documents


3 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

RAN

11.0

Signalling Analysis Guide

Issue 01

Date 2009-03-25

Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Page 2: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. provides customers with comprehensive technical support and service. For anyassistance, please contact our local office or company headquarters.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.Address: Huawei Industrial Base

Bantian, LonggangShenzhen 518129People's Republic of China

Website: http://www.huawei.com

Email: [email protected]

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2009. All rights reserved.No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior writtenconsent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are the property of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders. NoticeThe information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in thepreparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but the statements, information, andrecommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Page 3: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Contents

About This Document.....................................................................................................................1

1 Cell Setup Procedure.................................................................................................................1-11.1 Protocols Related to Cell Setup.......................................................................................................................1-21.2 Triggering Conditions of Cell Setup...............................................................................................................1-21.3 Signaling Procedure of Successful Cell Setup................................................................................................1-21.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Cell Setup Procedure................................................................................1-31.5 Elementary Procedures of Cell Setup..............................................................................................................1-6

1.5.1 Resource Status Indication Procedure....................................................................................................1-61.5.2 Resource Audit Procedure......................................................................................................................1-71.5.3 Cell Setup Procedure..............................................................................................................................1-81.5.4 Common Transport Channel Setup Procedure.......................................................................................1-91.5.5 Iub User Plane Setup Procedure...........................................................................................................1-101.5.6 System Information Update Procedure................................................................................................1-111.5.7 Physical Shared Channel Reconfiguration Procedure..........................................................................1-121.5.8 Common Measurement Initiation Procedure.......................................................................................1-13

2 Cell Reconfiguration Procedure..............................................................................................2-12.1 Protocols Related to Cell Reconfiguration......................................................................................................2-22.2 Triggering Conditions of Cell Reconfiguration..............................................................................................2-22.3 Signaling Procedure of Cell Reconfiguration.................................................................................................2-22.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Cell Reconfiguration Procedure...............................................................2-3

3 Cell Deletion Procedure............................................................................................................3-13.1 Protocols Related to Cell Deletion..................................................................................................................3-23.2 Triggering Conditions of Cell Deletion..........................................................................................................3-23.3 Signaling Procedure of Cell Deletion..............................................................................................................3-23.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Cell Deletion Procedure...........................................................................3-3

4 Location Update Procedure......................................................................................................4-14.1 Protocols Related to Location Update.............................................................................................................4-24.2 Triggering Conditions of Location Update.....................................................................................................4-24.3 Signaling Procedure of a Successful Location Update...................................................................................4-24.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Location Update Procedure......................................................................4-34.5 Elementary Procedures of Location Update....................................................................................................4-6

4.5.1 RRC Connection Setup Procedure.........................................................................................................4-6

RANSignalling Analysis Guide Contents

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

i

Page 4: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

4.5.2 Location Update Procedure....................................................................................................................4-94.5.3 Iu Release Procedure............................................................................................................................4-104.5.4 RRC Connection Release Procedure....................................................................................................4-11

5 Outgoing Call Procedure..........................................................................................................5-15.1 Protocols Related to an Outgoing Call............................................................................................................5-25.2 Triggering Conditions of an Outgoing Call....................................................................................................5-25.3 Signaling Procedure of a Successful Outgoing Call.......................................................................................5-25.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Outgoing Call Procedure..........................................................................5-45.5 Elementary Procedures of an Outgoing Call...................................................................................................5-7

5.5.1 RRC Connection Setup Procedure.........................................................................................................5-85.5.2 Signaling Connection Setup Procedure (Outgoing Call).....................................................................5-115.5.3 Authentication and Security Mode Control Procedure........................................................................5-125.5.4 Call Setup Procedure (Outgoing Call).................................................................................................5-135.5.5 RAB Setup Procedure..........................................................................................................................5-155.5.6 Call Release Procedure (Outgoing Call)..............................................................................................5-165.5.7 RRC Connection Release Procedure....................................................................................................5-17

6 Incoming Call Procedure..........................................................................................................6-16.1 Protocols Related to an Incoming Call............................................................................................................6-26.2 Triggering Conditions of an Incoming Call....................................................................................................6-26.3 Signaling Procedure of a Successful Incoming Call.......................................................................................6-26.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Incoming Call Procedure..........................................................................6-46.5 Elementary Procedures of an Incoming Call...................................................................................................6-7

6.5.1 Paging Procedure....................................................................................................................................6-86.5.2 RRC Connection Setup Procedure.........................................................................................................6-96.5.3 Signaling Connection Setup Procedure (Incoming Call).....................................................................6-126.5.4 Authentication and Security Mode Control Procedure........................................................................6-136.5.5 Call Setup Procedure (Incoming Call).................................................................................................6-146.5.6 RAB Setup Procedure..........................................................................................................................6-166.5.7 Call Release Procedure (Incoming Call)..............................................................................................6-176.5.8 RRC Connection Release Procedure....................................................................................................6-19

7 Intra-Frequency Handover Procedure....................................................................................7-17.1 Types of Intra-Frequency Handover...............................................................................................................7-27.2 Intra-Frequency Soft Handover Within a NodeB............................................................................................7-2

7.2.1 Protocols Related to Intra-Frequency Soft Handover Within a NodeB.................................................7-37.2.2 Triggering Conditions of Intra-Frequency Soft Handover Within a NodeB..........................................7-37.2.3 Signaling Procedure of a Successful Intra-Frequency Soft Handover Within a NodeB........................7-37.2.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Procedure of Intra-Frequency Soft Handover Within a NodeB......7-47.2.5 Elementary Procedures of Intra-Frequency Soft Handover Within a NodeB........................................7-5

7.3 Intra-Frequency Soft Handover Between NodeBs in an RNC........................................................................7-87.3.1 Protocols Related to Intra-Frequency Soft Handover Between NodeBs in an RNC.............................7-97.3.2 Triggering Conditions of Intra-Frequency Soft Handover Between NodeBs in an RNC......................7-9

ContentsRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

ii Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 5: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

7.3.3 Signaling Procedure of a Successful Intra-Frequency Soft Handover Between NodeBs in an RNC.........................................................................................................................................................................7-97.3.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Procedure of Intra-Frequency Soft Handover Between NodeBs in anRNC...............................................................................................................................................................7-107.3.5 Elementary Procedures of Intra-Frequency Soft Handover Between NodeBs in an RNC..................7-12

7.4 Intra-Frequency Soft Handover Between RNCs...........................................................................................7-177.4.1 Protocols Related to Intra-Frequency Soft Handover Between RNCs.................................................7-187.4.2 Triggering Conditions of Intra-Frequency Soft Handover Between RNCs.........................................7-187.4.3 Signaling Procedure of a Successful Intra-Frequency Soft Handover Between RNCs.......................7-187.4.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Procedure of Intra-Frequency Soft Handover Between RNCs.....7-197.4.5 Elementary Procedures of Intra-Frequency Soft Handover Between RNCs.......................................7-22

7.5 Intra-Frequency Hard Handover Between NodeBs in an RNC....................................................................7-297.5.1 Protocols Related to Intra-Frequency Hard Handover Between NodeBs in an RNC..........................7-307.5.2 Triggering Conditions of Intra-Frequency Hard Handover Between NodeBs in an RNC..................7-307.5.3 Signaling Procedure of a Successful Intra-Frequency Hard Handover Between NodeBs in an RNC.......................................................................................................................................................................7-307.5.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Procedure of Intra-Frequency Hard Handover Between NodeBs in anRNC...............................................................................................................................................................7-317.5.5 Elementary Procedures of Intra-Frequency Hard Handover Between NodeBs in an RNC.................7-33

7.6 Intra-Frequency Hard Handover Between RNCs..........................................................................................7-387.6.1 Protocols Related to Intra-Frequency Hard Handover Between RNCs...............................................7-397.6.2 Triggering Conditions of Intra-Frequency Hard Handover Between RNCs........................................7-397.6.3 Signaling Procedure of a Successful Intra-Frequency Hard Handover Between RNCs......................7-397.6.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Procedure of Intra-Frequency Hard Handover Between RNCs....7-407.6.5 Elementary Procedures of Intra-Frequency Hard Handover Between RNCs......................................7-43

8 Inter-Frequency Handover Procedure....................................................................................8-18.1 Types of Inter-Frequency Handover...............................................................................................................8-28.2 Inter-Frequency Handover Between NodeBs in an RNC...............................................................................8-2

8.2.1 Protocols Related to Inter-Frequency Handover Between NodeBs in an RNC.....................................8-38.2.2 Triggering Conditions of Inter-Frequency Handover Between NodeBs in an RNC.............................8-38.2.3 Signaling Procedure of a Successful Inter-Frequency Handover Between NodeBs in an RNC............8-38.2.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Procedure of Inter-Frequency Handover Between NodeBs in an RNC.........................................................................................................................................................................8-48.2.5 Elementary Procedures of Inter-Frequency Handover Between NodeBs in an RNC............................8-6

8.3 Inter-Frequency Handover Between RNCs...................................................................................................8-128.3.1 Protocols Related to Inter-Frequency Handover Between RNCs........................................................8-138.3.2 Triggering Conditions of Inter-Frequency Handover Between RNCs.................................................8-138.3.3 Signaling Procedure of a Successful Inter-Frequency Handover Between RNCs...............................8-138.3.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Procedure of Inter-Frequency Handover Between RNCs.............8-148.3.5 Elementary Procedures of Inter-Frequency Handover Between RNCs...............................................8-16

9 Inter-RAT Handover Procedure..............................................................................................9-19.1 Types of Inter-RAT Handover........................................................................................................................9-29.2 Inter-RAT CS Handover from WCDMA to GSM..........................................................................................9-2

RANSignalling Analysis Guide Contents

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

iii

Page 6: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

9.2.1 Protocols Related to Inter-RAT CS Handover from WCDMA to GSM................................................9-29.2.2 Triggering Conditions of Inter-RAT CS Handover from WCDMA to GSM........................................9-39.2.3 Signaling Procedure of a Successful Inter-RAT CS Handover from WCDMA to GSM...................... 9-39.2.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Procedure of Inter-RAT CS Handover from WCDMA to GSM.........................................................................................................................................................................9-49.2.5 Elementary Procedures of Inter-RAT CS Handover from WCDMA to GSM.......................................9-5

9.3 Inter-RAT CS Handover from GSM to WCDMA..........................................................................................9-89.3.1 Protocols Related to Inter-RAT CS Handover from GSM to WCDMA................................................9-99.3.2 Triggering Conditions of Inter-RAT CS Handover from GSM to WCDMA........................................9-99.3.3 Signaling Procedure of a Successful Inter-RAT CS Handover from GSM to WCDMA...................... 9-99.3.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Procedure of Inter-RAT CS Handover from GSM to WCDMA.......................................................................................................................................................................9-119.3.5 Elementary Procedures of Inter-RAT CS Handover from GSM to WCDMA.....................................9-13

9.4 Inter-RAT PS Handover from WCDMA to GSM........................................................................................9-199.4.1 Protocols Related to Inter-RAT PS Handover from WCDMA to GSM..............................................9-199.4.2 Triggering Conditions of Inter-RAT PS Handover from WCDMA to GSM......................................9-199.4.3 Signaling Procedure of Successful Inter-RAT PS Handover from WCDMA to GSM.......................9-209.4.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Procedure of Inter-RAT PS Handover from WCDMA to GSM.......................................................................................................................................................................9-219.4.5 Elementary Procedures of Inter-RAT PS Handover from WCDMA to GSM.....................................9-22

9.5 Inter-RAT PS Handover from GSM to WCDMA........................................................................................9-26

10 SRNS Relocation Procedure.................................................................................................10-110.1 Types of SRNS Relocation.........................................................................................................................10-210.2 Static Relocation.........................................................................................................................................10-2

10.2.1 Protocols Related to Static Relocation...............................................................................................10-210.2.2 Triggering Conditions of Static Relocation.......................................................................................10-310.2.3 Signaling Procedure of a Successful Static Relocation......................................................................10-310.2.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Static Relocation Procedure........................................................10-310.2.5 Elementary Procedures of Static Relocation......................................................................................10-6

10.3 Relocation with Cell/URA Update............................................................................................................10-1210.3.1 Protocols Related to Relocation with Cell/URA Update.................................................................10-1310.3.2 Triggering Conditions of Relocation with Cell/URA Update..........................................................10-1310.3.3 Signaling Procedure of a Successful Relocation with Cell/URA Update........................................10-1310.3.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Procedure of Relocation with Cell/URA Update......................10-1510.3.5 Elementary Procedures of Relocation with Cell/URA Update........................................................10-17

10.4 Relocation with Hard Handover................................................................................................................10-2510.4.1 Protocols Related to Relocation with Hard Handover.....................................................................10-2610.4.2 Triggering Conditions of Relocation with Hard Handover..............................................................10-2610.4.3 Signaling Procedure of a Successful Relocation with Hard Handover............................................10-2610.4.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Procedure of Relocation with Hard Handover..........................10-2710.4.5 Elementary Procedures of Relocation with Hard Handover............................................................10-30

10.5 DSCR Procedure.......................................................................................................................................10-3610.5.1 Protocols Related to the DSCR Procedure.......................................................................................10-36

ContentsRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

iv Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 7: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

10.5.2 Cause of Triggering the DSCR Procedure.......................................................................................10-3710.5.3 Successful DSCR Procedure............................................................................................................10-37

11 Location Service Procedure..................................................................................................11-111.1 Positioning Methods....................................................................................................................................11-211.2 Positioning Based on CELLID+RTT..........................................................................................................11-2

11.2.1 Protocols Related to Positioning Based on CELLID+RTT...............................................................11-211.2.2 Triggering Conditions of Positioning Based on CELLID+RTT........................................................11-311.2.3 Signaling Procedure of Successful Positioning Based on CELLID+RTT.........................................11-311.2.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Procedure of Positioning Based on CELLID+RTT or OTDOA-IPDL.......................................................................................................................................................................11-311.2.5 Elementary Procedures of Positioning Based on CELLID+RTT......................................................11-5

11.3 Positioning Based on OTDOA-IPDL..........................................................................................................11-711.3.1 Protocols Related to Positioning Based on OTDOA-IPDL...............................................................11-711.3.2 Triggering Conditions of Positioning Based on OTDOA-IPDL........................................................11-811.3.3 Signaling Procedure of Successful Positioning Based on OTDOA-IPDL.........................................11-811.3.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Procedure of Positioning Based on CELLID+RTT or OTDOA-IPDL.......................................................................................................................................................................11-811.3.5 Elementary Procedures of Positioning Based on OTDOA-IPDL....................................................11-10

11.4 Positioning Based on A-GPS....................................................................................................................11-1211.4.1 Protocols Related to Positioning Based on A-GPS..........................................................................11-1211.4.2 Triggering Conditions of Positioning Based on A-GPS..................................................................11-1211.4.3 Signaling Procedure of Successful Positioning Based on A-GPS...................................................11-1311.4.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Procedure of Positioning Based on A-GPS...............................11-1311.4.5 Elementary Procedures of Positioning Based on A-GPS.................................................................11-14

RANSignalling Analysis Guide Contents

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

v

Page 8: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)
Page 9: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Figures

Figure 1-1 Signaling procedure of successful cell setup......................................................................................1-3Figure 1-2 Example of Iub signaling tracing result..............................................................................................1-5Figure 1-3 Example of Q.AAL2 protocol tracing result......................................................................................1-5Figure 1-4 Resource status indication procedure.................................................................................................1-7Figure 1-5 Resource audit procedure...................................................................................................................1-8Figure 1-6 Cell setup procedure...........................................................................................................................1-9Figure 1-7 Common transport channel setup procedure....................................................................................1-10Figure 1-8 Iub user plane setup procedure.........................................................................................................1-11Figure 1-9 System information update procedure..............................................................................................1-12Figure 1-10 Physical shared channel reconfiguration procedure.......................................................................1-13Figure 1-11 Common measurement initiation procedure...................................................................................1-14Figure 2-1 Cell reconfiguration procedure...........................................................................................................2-2Figure 2-2 Example of Iub signaling tracing result..............................................................................................2-3Figure 3-1 Cell deletion procedure.......................................................................................................................3-2Figure 3-2 Example of Iub signaling tracing result..............................................................................................3-3Figure 4-1 Signaling procedure of a successful location update..........................................................................4-3Figure 4-2 Example of Uu signaling tracing result..............................................................................................4-5Figure 4-3 Example of Iub signaling tracing result..............................................................................................4-5Figure 4-4 Example of Iu signaling tracing result................................................................................................4-5Figure 4-5 RRC connection setup procedure on a DCH......................................................................................4-7Figure 4-6 RRC connection setup procedure on a CCH......................................................................................4-8Figure 4-7 RRC connection rejected procedure...................................................................................................4-8Figure 4-8 Location update procedure.................................................................................................................4-9Figure 4-9 Iu release procedure..........................................................................................................................4-10Figure 4-10 RRC connection release procedure (from a DCH).........................................................................4-12Figure 4-11 RRC connection release procedure (from a CCH).........................................................................4-13Figure 5-1 Signaling procedure of a successful outgoing call.............................................................................5-3Figure 5-2 Example of Uu signaling tracing result..............................................................................................5-6Figure 5-3 Example of Iub signaling tracing result..............................................................................................5-7Figure 5-4 Example of Iu signaling tracing result................................................................................................5-7Figure 5-5 RRC connection setup procedure on a DCH......................................................................................5-9Figure 5-6 RRC connection setup procedure on a CCH....................................................................................5-10Figure 5-7 RRC connection rejected procedure.................................................................................................5-10

RANSignalling Analysis Guide Figures

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

vii

Page 10: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Figure 5-8 Signaling connection setup procedure..............................................................................................5-11Figure 5-9 Authentication and security mode control procedure.......................................................................5-12Figure 5-10 Call setup procedure (outgoing call)...............................................................................................5-14Figure 5-11 Successful RAB setup procedure...................................................................................................5-15Figure 5-12 Unsuccessful RAB setup procedure...............................................................................................5-16Figure 5-13 Call release procedure (outgoing call)............................................................................................5-17Figure 5-14 RRC connection release procedure (from a DCH).........................................................................5-18Figure 5-15 RRC connection release procedure (from a CCH).........................................................................5-19Figure 6-1 Signaling procedure of a successful incoming call.............................................................................6-3Figure 6-2 Example of Uu signaling tracing result..............................................................................................6-6Figure 6-3 Example of Iub signaling tracing result..............................................................................................6-7Figure 6-4 Example of Iu signaling tracing result................................................................................................6-7Figure 6-5 Paging procedure (for a UE that is in idle mode or in PCH state)......................................................6-8Figure 6-6 Paging procedure (for a UE that is in CELL_DCH or CELL_FACH state)......................................6-9Figure 6-7 RRC connection setup procedure on a DCH....................................................................................6-10Figure 6-8 RRC connection setup procedure on a CCH....................................................................................6-11Figure 6-9 RRC connection rejected procedure.................................................................................................6-11Figure 6-10 Signaling connection setup procedure............................................................................................6-12Figure 6-11 Authentication and security mode control procedure.....................................................................6-13Figure 6-12 Call setup procedure (incoming call)..............................................................................................6-15Figure 6-13 Successful RAB setup procedure...................................................................................................6-16Figure 6-14 Unsuccessful RAB setup procedure...............................................................................................6-17Figure 6-15 Call release procedure (incoming call)...........................................................................................6-18Figure 6-16 RRC connection release procedure (from a DCH).........................................................................6-19Figure 6-17 RRC connection release procedure (from a CCH).........................................................................6-20Figure 7-1 Signaling procedure of a successful intra-frequency soft handover within a NodeB.........................7-3Figure 7-2 Example of Uu signaling tracing result..............................................................................................7-4Figure 7-3 Example of Iub signaling tracing result..............................................................................................7-5Figure 7-4 Radio link addition procedure............................................................................................................7-6Figure 7-5 Active set update procedure................................................................................................................7-7Figure 7-6 Radio link deletion procedure.............................................................................................................7-8Figure 7-7 Signaling procedure of a successful intra-frequency soft handover between NodeBs in an RNC.............................................................................................................................................................................7-10Figure 7-8 Example of Uu signaling tracing result............................................................................................7-11Figure 7-9 Example of Iub signaling tracing result............................................................................................7-11Figure 7-10 Example of Q.AAL2 signaling tracing result.................................................................................7-12Figure 7-11 Radio link setup procedure (intra-RNC handover or GSM to WCDMA CS handover)................7-13Figure 7-12 Iub user plane setup procedure.......................................................................................................7-14Figure 7-13 Radio link restoration procedure (intra-RNC handover or GSM to WCDMA CS handover).......7-15Figure 7-14 Active set update procedure............................................................................................................7-15Figure 7-15 Radio link deletion procedure.........................................................................................................7-16Figure 7-16 Iub user plane release procedure.....................................................................................................7-17Figure 7-17 Signaling procedure of a successful intra-frequency soft handover between RNCs......................7-19

FiguresRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

viii Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 11: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Figure 7-18 Example of Uu signaling tracing result..........................................................................................7-20Figure 7-19 Example of Iub signaling tracing result (source RNC)..................................................................7-21Figure 7-20 Example of Iub signaling tracing result (target RNC)....................................................................7-21Figure 7-21 Example of Iur signaling tracing result..........................................................................................7-21Figure 7-22 Example of Q.AAL2 signaling tracing result.................................................................................7-21Figure 7-23 Radio link setup procedure (inter-RNC handover).........................................................................7-23Figure 7-24 Iub user plane setup procedure.......................................................................................................7-24Figure 7-25 Radio link restoration procedure (inter-RNC handover)................................................................7-24Figure 7-26 Iur user plane setup procedure........................................................................................................7-25Figure 7-27 Active set update procedure............................................................................................................7-26Figure 7-28 Radio link deletion procedure.........................................................................................................7-27Figure 7-29 Iub user plane release procedure.....................................................................................................7-28Figure 7-30 Iur user plane release procedure.....................................................................................................7-29Figure 7-31 Signaling procedure of a successful intra-frequency hard handover between NodeBs in an RNC.............................................................................................................................................................................7-31Figure 7-32 Example of Uu signaling tracing result..........................................................................................7-32Figure 7-33 Example of Iub signaling tracing result..........................................................................................7-32Figure 7-34 Example of Q.AAL2 signaling tracing result.................................................................................7-33Figure 7-35 Radio link setup procedure (intra-RNC handover or GSM to WCDMA CS handover)................7-34Figure 7-36 Iub user plane setup procedure.......................................................................................................7-35Figure 7-37 Radio link restoration procedure (intra-RNC handover or GSM to WCDMA CS handover).......7-36Figure 7-38 Physical channel reconfiguration procedure...................................................................................7-36Figure 7-39 Radio link deletion procedure.........................................................................................................7-37Figure 7-40 Iub user plane release procedure.....................................................................................................7-38Figure 7-41 Signaling procedure of a successful intra-frequency hard handover between RNCs.....................7-40Figure 7-42 Example of Uu signaling tracing result..........................................................................................7-41Figure 7-43 Example of Iub signaling tracing result (source RNC)..................................................................7-42Figure 7-44 Example of Iub signaling tracing result (target RNC)....................................................................7-42Figure 7-45 Example of Iur signaling tracing result..........................................................................................7-42Figure 7-46 Example of Q.AAL2 signaling tracing result.................................................................................7-42Figure 7-47 Radio link setup procedure (inter-RNC handover).........................................................................7-44Figure 7-48 Iub user plane setup procedure.......................................................................................................7-45Figure 7-49 Radio link restoration procedure (inter-RNC handover)................................................................7-45Figure 7-50 Iur user plane setup procedure........................................................................................................7-46Figure 7-51 Physical channel reconfiguration procedure...................................................................................7-47Figure 7-52 Radio link deletion procedure.........................................................................................................7-48Figure 7-53 Iub user plane release procedure.....................................................................................................7-49Figure 7-54 Iur user plane release procedure.....................................................................................................7-50Figure 8-1 Signaling procedure of a successful inter-frequency handover between NodeBs in an RNC............8-4Figure 8-2 Example of Uu signaling tracing result..............................................................................................8-5Figure 8-3 Example of Iub signaling tracing result..............................................................................................8-5Figure 8-4 Example of Q.AAL2 signaling tracing result.....................................................................................8-6Figure 8-5 Radio link addition procedure............................................................................................................ 8-7

RANSignalling Analysis Guide Figures

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

ix

Page 12: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Figure 8-6 Radio link setup procedure (intra-RNC handover or GSM to WCDMA CS handover)....................8-8Figure 8-7 Iub user plane setup procedure...........................................................................................................8-9Figure 8-8 Radio link restoration procedure (intra-RNC handover or GSM to WCDMA CS handover).........8-10Figure 8-9 Physical channel reconfiguration procedure.....................................................................................8-10Figure 8-10 Radio link deletion procedure.........................................................................................................8-11Figure 8-11 Iub user plane release procedure.....................................................................................................8-12Figure 8-12 Signaling procedure of a successful inter-frequency handover between RNCs.............................8-14Figure 8-13 Example of Uu signaling tracing result..........................................................................................8-15Figure 8-14 Example of Iub signaling tracing result (source RNC)..................................................................8-16Figure 8-15 Example of Iub signaling tracing result (target RNC)....................................................................8-16Figure 8-16 Example of Iur signaling tracing result..........................................................................................8-16Figure 8-17 Example of Q.AAL2 signaling tracing result.................................................................................8-16Figure 8-18 Radio link setup procedure (inter-RNC handover).........................................................................8-17Figure 8-19 Iub user plane setup procedure.......................................................................................................8-18Figure 8-20 Radio link restoration procedure (inter-RNC handover)................................................................8-19Figure 8-21 Iur user plane setup procedure........................................................................................................8-20Figure 8-22 Physical channel reconfiguration procedure...................................................................................8-21Figure 8-23 Radio link deletion procedure.........................................................................................................8-22Figure 8-24 Iub user plane release procedure.....................................................................................................8-23Figure 8-25 Iur user plane release procedure.....................................................................................................8-24Figure 9-1 Signaling procedure of a successful inter-RAT CS handover from WCDMA to GSM.....................9-3Figure 9-2 Example of Uu signaling tracing result..............................................................................................9-4Figure 9-3 Example of Iub signaling tracing result..............................................................................................9-5Figure 9-4 Example of Iu signaling tracing result................................................................................................9-5Figure 9-5 Relocation preparation procedure.......................................................................................................9-6Figure 9-6 Iu release procedure............................................................................................................................9-7Figure 9-7 Radio link deletion procedure.............................................................................................................9-8Figure 9-8 Signaling procedure of a successful inter-RAT CS handover from GSM to WCDMA...................9-10Figure 9-9 Example of Uu signaling tracing result............................................................................................9-12Figure 9-10 Example of Iub signaling tracing result..........................................................................................9-12Figure 9-11 Example of Iu signaling tracing result............................................................................................9-12Figure 9-12 Relocation resource allocation procedure.......................................................................................9-14Figure 9-13 Radio link setup procedure (intra-RNC handover or GSM to WCDMA CS handover)................9-15Figure 9-14 Radio link restoration procedure (intra-RNC handover or GSM to WCDMA CS handover).......9-16Figure 9-15 UE capability enquiry procedure....................................................................................................9-16Figure 9-16 Security mode control procedure....................................................................................................9-17Figure 9-17 UTRAN mobility information procedure.......................................................................................9-18Figure 9-18 Signaling procedure of a successful inter-RAT PS handover from WCDMA to GSM.................9-20Figure 9-19 Example of Uu signaling tracing result..........................................................................................9-22Figure 9-20 Example of Iub signaling tracing result..........................................................................................9-22Figure 9-21 Example of Iu signaling tracing result............................................................................................9-22Figure 9-22 Cell change order from UTRAN procedure...................................................................................9-23

FiguresRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

x Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 13: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Figure 9-23 SRNS context transfer procedure...................................................................................................9-24Figure 9-24 Iu release procedure........................................................................................................................9-25Figure 9-25 Radio link deletion procedure.........................................................................................................9-26Figure 10-1 Signaling procedure of a successful static relocation.....................................................................10-3Figure 10-2 Example of Uu signaling tracing result..........................................................................................10-5Figure 10-3 Example of Iur signaling tracing on the SRNC..............................................................................10-5Figure 10-4 Example of Iur signaling tracing on the DRNC.............................................................................10-5Figure 10-5 Example of Iu signaling tracing on the SRNC...............................................................................10-6Figure 10-6 Example of Iu signaling tracing on the DRNC...............................................................................10-6Figure 10-7 Relocation preparation procedure...................................................................................................10-7Figure 10-8 Relocation resource allocation procedure.......................................................................................10-8Figure 10-9 Relocation commit procedure (static relocation or relocation with cell/URA update)..................10-9Figure 10-10 UTRAN mobility information procedure...................................................................................10-10Figure 10-11 UE capability enquiry procedure................................................................................................10-11Figure 10-12 Iu release procedure....................................................................................................................10-12Figure 10-13 Signaling procedure of a successful relocation with cell/URA update......................................10-14Figure 10-14 Example of Uu signaling tracing for the relocation with cell update.........................................10-16Figure 10-15 Example of Iur signaling tracing on the SRNC..........................................................................10-17Figure 10-16 Example of Iur signaling tracing on the DRNC.........................................................................10-17Figure 10-17 Example of Iu signaling tracing on the SRNC...........................................................................10-17Figure 10-18 Example of Iu signaling tracing on the DRNC...........................................................................10-17Figure 10-19 Relocation preparation procedure...............................................................................................10-19Figure 10-20 Relocation resource allocation procedure...................................................................................10-20Figure 10-21 Cell update procedure.................................................................................................................10-21Figure 10-22 URA update procedure...............................................................................................................10-22Figure 10-23 Relocation commit procedure (static relocation or relocation with cell/URA update)..............10-23Figure 10-24 UE capability enquiry procedure................................................................................................10-24Figure 10-25 Iu release procedure....................................................................................................................10-25Figure 10-26 Signaling procedure of a successful relocation with hard handover..........................................10-27Figure 10-27 Example of Uu signaling tracing on the SRNC..........................................................................10-29Figure 10-28 Example of Uu signaling tracing on the DRNC.........................................................................10-29Figure 10-29 Example of Iu signaling tracing on the SRNC...........................................................................10-29Figure 10-30 Example of Iu signaling tracing on the DRNC...........................................................................10-30Figure 10-31 Relocation preparation procedure...............................................................................................10-31Figure 10-32 Relocation resource allocation procedure...................................................................................10-32Figure 10-33 Relocation commit procedure (relocation with hard handover).................................................10-33Figure 10-34 Physical channel reconfiguration procedure...............................................................................10-34Figure 10-35 UE capability enquiry procedure................................................................................................10-35Figure 10-36 Iu release procedure....................................................................................................................10-36Figure 10-37 Successful DSCR procedure.......................................................................................................10-37Figure 11-1 Signaling procedure of successful positioning based on CELLID+RTT.......................................11-3Figure 11-2 Example of CDT tracing result.......................................................................................................11-4

RANSignalling Analysis Guide Figures

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xi

Page 14: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Figure 11-3 UE measurement procedure............................................................................................................11-5Figure 11-4 RTT measurement procedure.........................................................................................................11-6Figure 11-5 Signaling procedure of successful positioning based on OTDOA-IPDL.......................................11-8Figure 11-6 Example of CDT tracing result.......................................................................................................11-9Figure 11-7 UE measurement procedure..........................................................................................................11-10Figure 11-8 RTT measurement procedure.......................................................................................................11-11Figure 11-9 Signaling procedure of successful positioning based on A-GPS.................................................11-13Figure 11-10 Example of CDT tracing result...................................................................................................11-14Figure 11-11 UE measurement procedure........................................................................................................11-15

FiguresRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

xii Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 15: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Tables

Table 1-1 Triggering conditions of cell setup......................................................................................................1-2Table 1-2 Messages to be traced...........................................................................................................................1-4Table 2-1 Messages to be traced...........................................................................................................................2-3Table 3-1 Messages to be traced...........................................................................................................................3-3Table 4-1 Messages to be traced...........................................................................................................................4-4Table 5-1 Messages to be traced...........................................................................................................................5-4Table 6-1 Messages to be traced...........................................................................................................................6-4Table 7-1 Types of intra-frequency handover......................................................................................................7-2Table 7-2 Messages to be traced...........................................................................................................................7-4Table 7-3 Messages to be traced.........................................................................................................................7-11Table 7-4 Messages to be traced.........................................................................................................................7-20Table 7-5 Messages to be traced.........................................................................................................................7-32Table 7-6 Messages to be traced.........................................................................................................................7-41Table 8-1 Types of inter-frequency handover......................................................................................................8-2Table 8-2 Messages to be traced...........................................................................................................................8-5Table 8-3 Messages to be traced.........................................................................................................................8-15Table 9-1 Messages to be traced...........................................................................................................................9-4Table 9-2 Messages to be traced.........................................................................................................................9-11Table 9-3 Messages to be traced.........................................................................................................................9-21Table 10-1 Messages to be traced on the SRNC................................................................................................10-4Table 10-2 Messages to be traced on the DRNC................................................................................................10-4Table 10-3 Messages to be traced on the SRNC..............................................................................................10-15Table 10-4 Messages to be traced on the DRNC..............................................................................................10-15Table 10-5 Messages to be traced on the SRNC..............................................................................................10-28Table 10-6 Messages to be traced on the DRNC..............................................................................................10-28Table 11-1 Messages to be traced.......................................................................................................................11-4Table 11-2 Messages to be traced.......................................................................................................................11-9Table 11-3 Messages to be traced.....................................................................................................................11-14

RANSignalling Analysis Guide Tables

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xiii

Page 16: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)
Page 17: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

About This Document

PurposeThis document describes the triggering conditions of common signaling procedures, explainsthe procedures in normal and abnormal conditions, and presents the ways of signaling tracingon the LMT.

VersionThe following table lists the product versions related to this document.

Product Name Version

RNC V100R011

V200R011

NodeB V100R011

V200R011

Intended AudienceThis document is intended for:

l Field engineers

l System engineers

Organization

1 Cell Setup Procedure

The cell setup procedure is performed to set up a WCDMA cell. This topic describes cell setupin terms of protocols, triggering conditions, signaling procedure of successful cell setup, andsignaling tracing on the RNC LMT. This topic also describes the elementary procedures in termsof functions, triggering conditions, and signaling in normal and abnormal conditions.

2 Cell Reconfiguration Procedure

The cell reconfiguration procedure is performed to reconfigure a cell in the NodeB. This topicdescribes the cell reconfiguration procedure in terms of protocols, triggering conditions,signaling procedure, and signaling tracing on the RNC LMT.

RANSignalling Analysis Guide About This Document

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1

Page 18: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

3 Cell Deletion Procedure

The cell deletion procedure is performed to delete a cell from the NodeB. This topic describesthe cell deletion procedure in terms of protocols, triggering conditions, signaling procedure, andsignaling tracing on the RNC LMT.

4 Location Update Procedure

Location area update is initiated by the UE to inform the CS service domain of the core networkthat the UE has entered a new location area. Routing area update is initiated by the UE to informthe PS service domain of the core network that the UE has entered a new routing area. Thischapter describes the location update in terms of protocols, triggering conditions, signalingprocedure of successful location update, signaling tracing on the RNC LMT, and elementaryprocedures. This chapter also describes the elementary procedures in terms of functions,triggering conditions, procedure, and signaling in abnormal conditions.

5 Outgoing Call Procedure

The outgoing call procedure is performed for a UE to call another terminal, such as a PublicSwitched Telephony Network (PSTN) terminal. This topic describes outgoing call setup andrelease in terms of protocols, triggering conditions, signaling procedure of a successful outgoingcall, and signaling tracing on the RNC LMT. This topic also describes the elementary proceduresin terms of functions, triggering conditions, and signaling in normal and abnormal conditions.

6 Incoming Call Procedure

In the incoming call procedure, the network calls a UE and the UE responds to the paging. Thistopic describes incoming call setup and release in terms of protocols, triggering conditions,signaling procedure of a successful incoming call, and signaling tracing on the RNC LMT. Thistopic also describes the elementary procedures in terms of functions, triggering conditions, andsignaling in normal and abnormal conditions.

7 Intra-Frequency Handover Procedure

The intra-frequency handover procedure is performed to hand over a UE from the WCDMA cellthat it camps on to an intra-frequency WCDMA cell. This topic describes intra-frequencyhandover in terms of types, protocols, triggering conditions, signaling procedure of a successfulintra-frequency handover, and signaling tracing on the RNC LMT. This topic also describes theelementary procedures in terms of functions, triggering conditions, and signaling in normal andabnormal conditions.

8 Inter-Frequency Handover Procedure

The inter-frequency handover procedure is performed to hand over a UE from the WCDMA cellthat it camps on to an inter-frequency WCDMA cell. This topic describes inter-frequencyhandover in terms of types, protocols, triggering conditions, signaling procedure of a successfulinter-frequency handover, and signaling tracing on the RNC LMT. This topic also describes theelementary procedures in terms of functions, triggering conditions, and signaling in normal andabnormal conditions.

9 Inter-RAT Handover Procedure

The inter-RAT handover procedure is performed to hand over a UE from a WCDMA cell to aGSM cell or the other way round. This topic describes inter-RAT handover in terms of types,protocols, triggering conditions, signaling procedure of a successful inter-RAT handover, andsignaling tracing on the RNC LMT. This topic also describes the elementary procedures in termsof functions, triggering conditions, and signaling in normal and abnormal conditions.

10 SRNS Relocation Procedure

About This DocumentRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 19: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

The SRNS relocation procedure is performed to change control from the SRNC of a UE toanother RNC. This topic describes the SRNS relocation in terms of types, protocols, triggeringconditions, signaling procedure of a successful SRNS relocation, and signaling tracing on theRNC LMT. This topic also describes the elementary procedures in terms of functions, triggeringconditions, and signaling in normal and abnormal conditions.

11 Location Service Procedure

The location service procedure is performed to identify the geographic location of a UE. Thistopic describes the location services in terms of positioning methods, protocols, triggeringconditions, signaling procedure of successful positioning, and signaling tracing on the RNCLMT. This topic also describes the elementary procedures in terms of functions, triggeringconditions, and signaling in normal and abnormal conditions.

ConventionsSymbol Conventions

The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Symbol Description

Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if notavoided,will result in death or serious injury.

Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, whichif not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if notavoided,could result in equipment damage, data loss,performance degradation, or unexpected results.

Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or savetime.

Provides additional information to emphasize or supplementimportant points of the main text.

General Conventions

The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Convention Description

Times New Roman Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.

Boldface Names of files, directories, folders, and users are inboldface. For example, log in as user root.

Italic Book titles are in italics.

Courier New Examples of information displayed on the screen are inCourier New.

RANSignalling Analysis Guide About This Document

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3

Page 20: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Command Conventions

The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Convention Description

Boldface The keywords of a command line are in boldface.

Italic Command arguments are in italics.

[ ] Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional.

{ x | y | ... } Optional items are grouped in braces and separated byvertical bars. One item is selected.

[ x | y | ... ] Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated byvertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected.

{ x | y | ... }* Optional items are grouped in braces and separated byvertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of allitems can be selected.

[ x | y | ... ]* Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated byvertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.

GUI Conventions

The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Convention Description

Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titlesare in boldface. For example, click OK.

> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder .

Keyboard Operations

The keyboard operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Format Description

Key Press the key. For example, press Enter and press Tab.

Key 1+Key 2 Press the keys concurrently. For example, pressing Ctrl+Alt+A means the three keys should be pressed concurrently.

Key 1, Key 2 Press the keys in turn. For example, pressing Alt, A meansthe two keys should be pressed in turn.

Mouse Operations

The mouse operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

About This DocumentRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 21: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Action Description

Click Select and release the primary mouse button without movingthe pointer.

Double-click Press the primary mouse button twice continuously andquickly without moving the pointer.

Drag Press and hold the primary mouse button and move thepointer to a certain position.

RANSignalling Analysis Guide About This Document

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5

Page 22: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)
Page 23: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

1 Cell Setup Procedure

About This Chapter

The cell setup procedure is performed to set up a WCDMA cell. This topic describes cell setupin terms of protocols, triggering conditions, signaling procedure of successful cell setup, andsignaling tracing on the RNC LMT. This topic also describes the elementary procedures in termsof functions, triggering conditions, and signaling in normal and abnormal conditions.

1.1 Protocols Related to Cell SetupThe cell setup procedure complies with some 3GPP TS25 protocols and an ITU-T protocol.

1.2 Triggering Conditions of Cell SetupCell setup can be triggered either through execution of an MML command or with a resourceaudit response from the NodeB.

1.3 Signaling Procedure of Successful Cell SetupThis describes the signaling procedure of successful cell setup. For the messages related to cellsetup failures, refer to the elementary procedures.

1.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Cell Setup ProcedureThe signaling tracing function of the RNC LMT can be used to trace the signaling procedure ofcell setup.

1.5 Elementary Procedures of Cell SetupThis describes the elementary procedures of cell setup in terms of triggering conditions andsignaling procedures in normal and abnormal conditions.

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 1 Cell Setup Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1-1

Page 24: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

1.1 Protocols Related to Cell SetupThe cell setup procedure complies with some 3GPP TS25 protocols and an ITU-T protocol.

The compliance protocols are as follows:l 3GPP TS25.427 "UTRAN Iur/Iub interface user plane protocol for DCH data streams"

l 3GPP TS25.433 "UTRAN Iub interface Node B Application Part (NBAP) signaling"

l 3GPP TS25.435 "UTRAN Iub interface user plane protocols for Common TransportChannel data streams"

l ITU-T Q.2630 "AAL type 2 Signalling Protocol"

1.2 Triggering Conditions of Cell SetupCell setup can be triggered either through execution of an MML command or with a resourceaudit response from the NodeB.

Table 1-1 describes the two triggering conditions.

Table 1-1 Triggering conditions of cell setup

TriggeringCondition Description Feature

Cell setup is initiatedby the RNC LMT.

Run the ACT CELL command onthe RNC LMT in online mode.

The resource auditprocedure is excluded fromcell setup.

The CRNC receives aresource auditresponse from theNodeB.

After receiving the resource auditresponse from the NodeB, the CRNCsends a cell setup request to theNodeB if the cell setup requirementsare fulfilled.

The resource auditprocedure is involved incell setup.

1.3 Signaling Procedure of Successful Cell SetupThis describes the signaling procedure of successful cell setup. For the messages related to cellsetup failures, refer to the elementary procedures.

Figure 1-1 shows the signaling procedure of successful cell setup.

1 Cell Setup ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

1-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 25: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Figure 1-1 Signaling procedure of successful cell setup

Note the following information about the procedure shown in Figure 1-1:l The resource status indication and resource audit procedures are involved in cell setup only

when the cell setup is triggered with a resource audit response from the NodeB.l The physical shared channel reconfiguration procedure is involved in cell setup only when

the cell to be set up is a High Speed Downlink Packet Access (HSDPA) cell.l If IP transport is applied to the Iub interface, the Iub user plane setup procedure is excluded

from cell setup.

1.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Cell Setup ProcedureThe signaling tracing function of the RNC LMT can be used to trace the signaling procedure ofcell setup.

Prerequisitel The RNC LMT works properly.

l You are logged in to the RNC as a user authorized to perform tracing management.

Context

Table 1-2 lists the messages to be traced.

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 1 Cell Setup Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1-3

Page 26: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Table 1-2 Messages to be traced

Interfaceand Protocolto Be Traced

Message Name on the LMT Message Name in Protocols

Iub

NBAP_AUDIT_REQ AUDIT REQUEST

NBAP_AUDIT_RSP AUDIT RESPONSE

NBAP_AUDIT_FAIL AUDIT FAILURE

NBAP_CELL_SETUP_REQ CELL SETUP REQUEST

NBAP_CELL_SETUP_RSP CELL SETUP RESPONSE

NBAP_CELL_SETUP_FAIL CELL SETUP FAILURE

NBAP_CELL_DEL_REQ CELL DELETION REQUEST

NBAP_CELL_DEL_RSP CELL DELETION RESPONSE

NBAP_COMM_TRANSP_CH_SETUP_REQ

COMMON TRANSPORT CHANNELSETUP REQUEST

NBAP_COMM_TRANSP_CH_SETUP_RSP

COMMON TRANSPORT CHANNELSETUP RESPONSE

NBAP_COMM_TRANSP_CH_SETUP_FAIL

COMMON TRANSPORT CHANNELSETUP FAILURE

NBAP_SYS_INFO_UPDATE_REQ

SYSTEM INFORMATION UPDATEREQUEST

NBAP_SYS_INFO_UPDATE_RSP

SYSTEM INFORMATION UPDATERESPONSE

NBAP_SYS_INFO_UPDATE_FAIL

SYSTEM INFORMATION UPDATEFAILURE

NBAP_PSCH_RECFG_REQ PHYSICAL SHARED CHANNELRECONFIGURATION REQUEST

NBAP_PSCH_RECFG_RSP PHYSICAL SHARED CHANNELRECONFIGURATION RESPONSE

NBAP_PSCH_RECFG_FAIL PHYSICAL SHARED CHANNELRECONFIGURATION FAILURE

NBAP_COMM_MEAS_INI_REQ

COMMON MEASUREMENTINITIATION REQUEST

NBAP_COMM_MEAS_INI_RSP

COMMON MEASUREMENTINITIATION RESPONSE

NBAP_COMM_MEAS_INI_FAIL

COMMON MEASUREMENTINITIATION FAILURE

1 Cell Setup ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

1-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 27: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Interfaceand Protocolto Be Traced

Message Name on the LMT Message Name in Protocols

NBAP_COMM_MEAS_RPRT COMMON MEASUREMENT REPORT

Q.AAL2 No message name needs to bespecified. –

ProcedureStep 1 Create an Iub tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task.

Figure 1-2 shows an example of Iub signaling tracing result.

Figure 1-2 Example of Iub signaling tracing result

In practice, the messages transmitted during cell setup depend on the configured data. In thisexample, an HSDPA cell is set up. During the cell setup, the common transport channel setupprocedure is performed to set up a Secondary Common Control Physical Channel (S-CCPCH),a Physical Random Access Channel (PRACH), a Paging Indicator Channel (PICH), and anAcquisition Indicator Channel (AICH). The S-CCPCH carries two Forward Access Channels(FACHs) and a Paging Channel (PCH). The PRACH carries a Random Access Channel (RACH).

Step 2 Create a Q.AAL2 tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task.Figure 1-3 shows an example of Q.AAL2 protocol tracing result.

Figure 1-3 Example of Q.AAL2 protocol tracing result

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 1 Cell Setup Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1-5

Page 28: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

----End

1.5 Elementary Procedures of Cell SetupThis describes the elementary procedures of cell setup in terms of triggering conditions andsignaling procedures in normal and abnormal conditions.

1.5.1 Resource Status Indication ProcedureThe NodeB performs the resource status indication procedure to report its physical resources tothe Control RNC (CRNC).

1.5.2 Resource Audit ProcedureThe CRNC performs the resource audit procedure to audit the configuration and status of thelogical resources in the NodeB. The audit may let the CRNC know the logical resources of theNodeB and re-synchronize its resources with those of the NodeB.

1.5.3 Cell Setup ProcedureThe cell setup procedure is performed to set up a cell in the NodeB.

1.5.4 Common Transport Channel Setup ProcedureThe common transport channel setup procedure is performed to establish the necessary resourcesin the NodeB, regarding the following channels: S-CCPCH, PICH, PRACH, AICH, FACH,PCH, and RACH.

1.5.5 Iub User Plane Setup ProcedureThe Iub user plane setup procedure is performed to set up bearers for data transmission on theIub interface.

1.5.6 System Information Update ProcedureThe system information update procedure is performed for the NodeB to schedule and updatethe system information segments, which are broadcast on the Broadcast Control Channel(BCCH), according to the parameters in the SYSTEM INFORMATION UPDATE REQUESTmessage.

1.5.7 Physical Shared Channel Reconfiguration ProcedureThe physical shared channel reconfiguration procedure is performed for the NodeB toreconfigure the physical channels according to the PHYSICAL SHARED CHANNELRECONFIGURATION REQUEST message sent from the CRNC.

1.5.8 Common Measurement Initiation ProcedureThe common measurement initiation procedure is performed for the CRNC to request theinitiation of measurements on common resources in a NodeB. The NodeB then initiates therequested measurements according to the parameters given in the COMMONMEASUREMENT INITIATION REQUEST message sent from the CRNC.

1.5.1 Resource Status Indication ProcedureThe NodeB performs the resource status indication procedure to report its physical resources tothe Control RNC (CRNC).

Triggering ConditionsThe NodeB triggers the procedure in one of the following conditions:

1 Cell Setup ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

1-6 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 29: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

l A local cell is added to the NodeB.

l A local cell is deleted from the NodeB.

l The capabilities of a local cell change at the NodeB.

l A cell changes its capability or resource operational state or both capability and resourceoperational state at the NodeB.

l Common physical channels or common transport channels or both common physicalchannels and common transport channels change their capabilities at the NodeB.

l A Communication Control Port (CCP) changes its resource operational state at the NodeB.

l A local cell group changes its resource capability at the NodeB.

Procedure

Figure 1-4 shows the resource status indication procedure.

Figure 1-4 Resource status indication procedure

The NodeB sends a RESOURCE STATUS INDICATION message to the CRNC through theNodeB Control Port (NCP). This message contains the triggering condition and the associatedlogical resource information.

1.5.2 Resource Audit ProcedureThe CRNC performs the resource audit procedure to audit the configuration and status of thelogical resources in the NodeB. The audit may let the CRNC know the logical resources of theNodeB and re-synchronize its resources with those of the NodeB.

Triggering Conditions

The CRNC receives a RESOURCE STATUS INDICATION message from the NodeB.

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 1 Cell Setup Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1-7

Page 30: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

ProcedureFigure 1-5 shows the resource audit procedure.

Figure 1-5 Resource audit procedure

The procedure shown in Figure 1-5 is described as follows:

1. The CRNC sends an AUDIT REQUEST message to the NodeB through the NCP to initiatethe resource audit procedure.

2. The NodeB sends a response message to the CRNC through the NCP.l If the audit is successful, the NodeB sends an AUDIT RESPONSE message.

The AUDIT RESPONSE message contains information about common physicalchannels of the logical cell, CCP, local cell, and local cell group. The information aboutlocal cell and local cell group is the abstraction of the physical resources of the NodeB.In this way, the CRNC can allocate the logical resources of the cell according to theabstract data.

l If the audit fails, the NodeB sends an AUDIT FAILURE message.

NOTE

A complete audit of a NodeB can be performed by one or more audit procedures. Each procedure carriesan audit sequence number.

1.5.3 Cell Setup ProcedureThe cell setup procedure is performed to set up a cell in the NodeB.

Triggering ConditionsAfter receiving the AUDIT RESPONSE message from the NodeB, the CRNC checks whetherthe conditions of cell setup are fulfilled and, if fulfilled, sends a CELL SETUP REQUESTmessage to the NodeB.

Whether the conditions of cell setup are fulfilled depends on the following local cell informationreported by the NodeB:

1 Cell Setup ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

1-8 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 31: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

l Downlink power range

l Minimum spreading factor

l HSDPA cell capability of the NodeB

l High Speed Downlink Shared Channel (HS-DSCH) resource information, which is usedto set up an HSDPA cell

l Common transport channel and physical channel information

l CCP and NCP information

ProcedureFigure 1-6 shows the cell setup procedure.

Figure 1-6 Cell setup procedure

The procedure shown in Figure 1-6 is described as follows:

1. The CRNC sends a CELL SETUP REQUEST message to the NodeB through the NCP.The NodeB then sets up a new cell according to the parameters given in the message.

2. The NodeB sends a response message to the CRNC through the NCP.l If the cell is set up, the NodeB sends a CELL SETUP RESPONSE message.

l If the cell fails to be set up, the NodeB sends a CELL SETUP FAILURE message.

1.5.4 Common Transport Channel Setup ProcedureThe common transport channel setup procedure is performed to establish the necessary resourcesin the NodeB, regarding the following channels: S-CCPCH, PICH, PRACH, AICH, FACH,PCH, and RACH.

Triggering ConditionsThe NodeB sends a CELL SETUP RESPONSE message to the CRNC.

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 1 Cell Setup Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1-9

Page 32: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Procedure

Figure 1-7 shows the common transport channel setup procedure.

Figure 1-7 Common transport channel setup procedure

The procedure shown in Figure 1-7 is described as follows:

1. The CRNC sends a COMMON TRANSPORT CHANNEL SETUP REQUEST messageto the NodeB through the NCP.

One message can be used to configure only one of the following combinations:

l One S-CCPCH and the related FACHs, PCH and PICH

l One PRACH and the related RACH and AICH

2. The NodeB sends a response message to the CRNC through the NCP.

l If the common transport channels are set up, the NodeB sends a COMMONTRANSPORT CHANNEL SETUP RESPONSE message.

l If the common transport channels fail to be set up, the NodeB sends a COMMONTRANSPORT CHANNEL SETUP FAILURE message. At the same time, the celldeletion procedure is triggered.

1.5.5 Iub User Plane Setup ProcedureThe Iub user plane setup procedure is performed to set up bearers for data transmission on theIub interface.

Triggering Conditions

The Iub user plane setup procedure can be triggered in one of the following conditions:

l The common transport channels are set up.

l The dedicated transport channels are set up.

Procedure

Figure 1-8 shows the Iub user plane setup procedure.

1 Cell Setup ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

1-10 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 33: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Figure 1-8 Iub user plane setup procedure

The procedure shown in Figure 1-8 is described as follows:

1. The CRNC uses the ALCAP protocol to send a QAAL2 ESTABLISH REQUEST messageto the NodeB.

2. The NodeB uses the ALCAP protocol to send a response message to the CRNC.l If the Iub data transport bearers are set up, the NodeB sends a QAAL2 ESTABLISH

CONFIRM message.l If an Iub data transport bearer fails to be set up, the NodeB sends a QAAL2 ESTABLISH

RELEASE CONFIRM message.

1.5.6 System Information Update ProcedureThe system information update procedure is performed for the NodeB to schedule and updatethe system information segments, which are broadcast on the Broadcast Control Channel(BCCH), according to the parameters in the SYSTEM INFORMATION UPDATE REQUESTmessage.

Triggering ConditionsThe system information update procedure can be triggered in one of the following conditions:l Physical shared channels are reconfigured.

l Cells are reconfigured.

l All common transport channels are set up.

ProcedureFigure 1-9 shows the system information update procedure.

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 1 Cell Setup Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1-11

Page 34: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Figure 1-9 System information update procedure

The procedure shown in Figure 1-9 is described as follows:

1. The CRNC sends a SYSTEM INFORMATION UPDATE REQUEST message to theNodeB through the NCP.The message includes the system information that is broadcast in segments on the BCCHand the scheduling information of each segment.

2. The NodeB schedules and updates the system information segments on the BCCHaccording to the parameters in the message.

3. The NodeB sends a response message to the CRNC through the NCP.l If the system information is updated, the NodeB sends a SYSTEM INFORMATION

UPDATE RESPONSE message.l If the system information fails to be updated, the NodeB sends a SYSTEM

INFORMATION UPDATE FAILURE message. At the same time, the cell deletionprocedure is triggered.

1.5.7 Physical Shared Channel Reconfiguration ProcedureThe physical shared channel reconfiguration procedure is performed for the NodeB toreconfigure the physical channels according to the PHYSICAL SHARED CHANNELRECONFIGURATION REQUEST message sent from the CRNC.

Triggering ConditionsThe system information is updated and the cell to be set up is an HSDPA cell.

ProcedureFigure 1-10 shows the physical shared channel reconfiguration procedure.

1 Cell Setup ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

1-12 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 35: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Figure 1-10 Physical shared channel reconfiguration procedure

The procedure shown in Figure 1-10 is described as follows:

1. The CRNC sends a PHYSICAL SHARED CHANNEL RECONFIGURATIONREQUEST message to the NodeB through the NCP to initiate the reconfiguration of theresources on the HS-DSCH and Enhanced UL DCH (E-DCH).

2. The NodeB sends a response message to the CRNC through the NCP.l If the physical shared channels are reconfigured, the NodeB sends a PHYSICAL

SHARED CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION RESPONSE message.l If the physical shared channels fail to be reconfigured, the NodeB sends a PHYSICAL

SHARED CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION FAILURE message.

1.5.8 Common Measurement Initiation ProcedureThe common measurement initiation procedure is performed for the CRNC to request theinitiation of measurements on common resources in a NodeB. The NodeB then initiates therequested measurements according to the parameters given in the COMMONMEASUREMENT INITIATION REQUEST message sent from the CRNC.

Triggering ConditionsThe cell is set up and activated.

ProcedureFigure 1-11 shows the common measurement initiation procedure.

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 1 Cell Setup Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1-13

Page 36: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Figure 1-11 Common measurement initiation procedure

The procedure shown in Figure 1-11 is described as follows:

1. The CRNC sends a COMMON MEASUREMENT INITIATION REQUEST message tothe NodeB through the NCP to initiate the common measurement initiation procedure. Themessage includes the measurement object type (such as cell and RACH), commonmeasurement type (such as transmit carrier power and received total wide band power),and report characteristics (such as On-Demand report, periodic report, and event report).

2. The NodeB initiates the requested measurement according to the parameters given in themessage.

3. The NodeB sends a response message to the CRNC through the NCP.l If the measurement requested by the CRNC is initiated, the NodeB sends a COMMON

MEASUREMENT INITIATION RESPONSE message.l If the measurement requested by the CRNC fails to be initiated, the NodeB sends a

COMMON MEASUREMENT INITIATION FAILURE message.

1 Cell Setup ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

1-14 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 37: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

2 Cell Reconfiguration Procedure

About This Chapter

The cell reconfiguration procedure is performed to reconfigure a cell in the NodeB. This topicdescribes the cell reconfiguration procedure in terms of protocols, triggering conditions,signaling procedure, and signaling tracing on the RNC LMT.

2.1 Protocols Related to Cell ReconfigurationThe cell reconfiguration procedure complies with a 3GPP TS25 protocol.

2.2 Triggering Conditions of Cell ReconfigurationCell reconfiguration is triggered when the parameters of the cell in the NodeB are modified onthe RNC LMT.

2.3 Signaling Procedure of Cell ReconfigurationThis describes the signaling procedure of cell reconfiguration.

2.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Cell Reconfiguration ProcedureThe signaling tracing function of the RNC LMT can be used to trace the signaling procedure ofcell reconfiguration.

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 2 Cell Reconfiguration Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-1

Page 38: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

2.1 Protocols Related to Cell ReconfigurationThe cell reconfiguration procedure complies with a 3GPP TS25 protocol.

The compliance protocol is the 3GPP TS25.433 "UTRAN Iub interface Node B ApplicationPart (NBAP) signaling".

2.2 Triggering Conditions of Cell ReconfigurationCell reconfiguration is triggered when the parameters of the cell in the NodeB are modified onthe RNC LMT.

To modify parameters of the cell in the NodeB, run the MOD CELL command online on theRNC LMT.

2.3 Signaling Procedure of Cell ReconfigurationThis describes the signaling procedure of cell reconfiguration.

Figure 2-1 shows the cell reconfiguration procedure.

Figure 2-1 Cell reconfiguration procedure

The procedure shown in Figure 2-1 is described as follows:

1. The CRNC sends a CELL RECONFIGURATION REQUEST message to the NodeBthrough the NCP. The NodeB then reconfigures the cell according to the parameters givenin the message.

2. The NodeB sends a response message to the CRNC through the NCP.l If the cell is reconfigured, the NodeB sends a CELL RECONFIGURATION

RESPONSE message.

2 Cell Reconfiguration ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

2-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 39: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

l If the cell fails to be reconfigured, the NodeB sends a CELL RECONFIGURATIONFAILURE message.

2.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Cell ReconfigurationProcedure

The signaling tracing function of the RNC LMT can be used to trace the signaling procedure ofcell reconfiguration.

Prerequisitel The RNC LMT works properly.

l You are logged in to the RNC as a user authorized to perform tracing management.

ContextTable 2-1 lists the messages to be traced.

Table 2-1 Messages to be traced

Interfaceand Protocolto Be Traced

Message Name on the LMT Message Name in Protocols

Iub

NBAP_CELL_RECFG_REQ CELL RECONFIGURATIONREQUEST

NBAP_CELL_RECFG_RSP CELL RECONFIGURATIONRESPONSE

NBAP_CELL_RECFG_FAIL CELL RECONFIGURATION FAILURE

ProcedureCreate an Iub tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task.Figure 2-2 shows an example of Iub signaling tracing result.

Figure 2-2 Example of Iub signaling tracing result

----End

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 2 Cell Reconfiguration Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-3

Page 40: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)
Page 41: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

3 Cell Deletion Procedure

About This Chapter

The cell deletion procedure is performed to delete a cell from the NodeB. This topic describesthe cell deletion procedure in terms of protocols, triggering conditions, signaling procedure, andsignaling tracing on the RNC LMT.

3.1 Protocols Related to Cell DeletionThe cell deletion procedure complies with a 3GPP TS25 protocol.

3.2 Triggering Conditions of Cell DeletionCell deletion can be triggered in different conditions, for example, when the common transportchannels fail to be set up.

3.3 Signaling Procedure of Cell DeletionThis describes the signaling procedure of cell deletion.

3.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Cell Deletion ProcedureThe signaling tracing function of the RNC LMT can be used to trace the signaling procedure ofcell deletion.

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 3 Cell Deletion Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-1

Page 42: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

3.1 Protocols Related to Cell DeletionThe cell deletion procedure complies with a 3GPP TS25 protocol.

The compliance protocol is the 3GPP TS25.433 "UTRAN Iub interface Node B ApplicationPart (NBAP) signalling".

3.2 Triggering Conditions of Cell DeletionCell deletion can be triggered in different conditions, for example, when the common transportchannels fail to be set up.

The cell deletion procedure can be triggered in one of the following conditions:

l The common transport channels fail to be set up.

l The system information fails to be updated.

l The common transport channels are deleted.

l The cell is deactivated on the RNC LMT.

l The cell is deleted on the RNC LMT.

3.3 Signaling Procedure of Cell DeletionThis describes the signaling procedure of cell deletion.

Figure 3-1 shows the cell deletion procedure.

Figure 3-1 Cell deletion procedure

The procedure shown in Figure 3-1 is described as follows:

1. The CRNC sends a CELL DELETION REQUEST message to the NodeB through the NCP.

3 Cell Deletion ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

3-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 43: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

2. The NodeB performs the following operations:

l Deletes the cell and any remaining common and dedicated channels within the cell. Thestates of the deleted cell and common channels are set to "Not existing".

l Initiates release of the user plane transport bearers for the removed common anddedicated channels.

l Deletes all radio links and all NodeB communication contexts within the cell.

3. When the cell is deleted, the NodeB sends a CELL DELETION RESPONSE message tothe CRNC through the NCP.

If the CELL DELETION REQUEST message includes a C-ID IE value that does not existin the NodeB, the NodeB sends through the NCP to the CRNC the CELL DELETIONRESPONSE message, in which the value of Criticality Diagnostics is "Notexisting".

3.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Cell DeletionProcedure

The signaling tracing function of the RNC LMT can be used to trace the signaling procedure ofcell deletion.

Prerequisitel The RNC LMT works properly.

l You are logged in to the RNC as a user authorized to perform tracing management.

Context

Table 3-1 lists the messages to be traced.

Table 3-1 Messages to be traced

Interface and Protocolto Be Traced

Message Name on theLMT Message Name in Protocols

IubNBAP_CELL_DEL_REQ CELL DELETION REQUEST

NBAP_CELL_DEL_RSP CELL DELETION RESPONSE

Procedure

Create an Iub tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task.Figure 3-2 shows an example of Iub signaling tracing result.

Figure 3-2 Example of Iub signaling tracing result

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 3 Cell Deletion Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-3

Page 44: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

----End

3 Cell Deletion ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

3-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 45: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

4 Location Update Procedure

About This Chapter

Location area update is initiated by the UE to inform the CS service domain of the core networkthat the UE has entered a new location area. Routing area update is initiated by the UE to informthe PS service domain of the core network that the UE has entered a new routing area. Thischapter describes the location update in terms of protocols, triggering conditions, signalingprocedure of successful location update, signaling tracing on the RNC LMT, and elementaryprocedures. This chapter also describes the elementary procedures in terms of functions,triggering conditions, procedure, and signaling in abnormal conditions.

4.1 Protocols Related to Location UpdateThe location update procedure complies with some 3GPP TS25 protocols and an ITU-T protocol.

4.2 Triggering Conditions of Location UpdateLocation update is triggered after the UE is powered on.

4.3 Signaling Procedure of a Successful Location UpdateThis describes the signaling procedure of a successful location update. For the messages relatedto location update failures, refer to the elementary procedures.

4.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Location Update ProcedureThe signaling tracing function of the RNC LMT can be used to trace the signaling procedure ofa location update.

4.5 Elementary Procedures of Location UpdateThis describes the elementary procedures of location update in terms of triggering conditionsand signaling procedures in normal and abnormal conditions.

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 4 Location Update Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-1

Page 46: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

4.1 Protocols Related to Location UpdateThe location update procedure complies with some 3GPP TS25 protocols and an ITU-T protocol.

The compliance protocols are as follows:l 3GPP TS25.331 "Radio Resource Control (RRC)"

l 3GPP TS25.413 "UTRAN Iu interface RANAP signalling"

l 3GPP TS25.433 "UTRAN Iub interface Node B Application Part (NBAP) signalling"

l ITU-T Q.2630 "AAL type 2 Signalling Protocol"

4.2 Triggering Conditions of Location UpdateLocation update is triggered after the UE is powered on.

After being powered on, the UE searches for a cell and then receives broadcast messages. Then,the UE triggers the location update procedure.

4.3 Signaling Procedure of a Successful Location UpdateThis describes the signaling procedure of a successful location update. For the messages relatedto location update failures, refer to the elementary procedures.

Figure 4-1 shows the signaling procedure of a successful location update.

4 Location Update ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

4-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 47: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Figure 4-1 Signaling procedure of a successful location update

Note the following information about the procedure shown in Figure 4-1:l The RRC connection can be set up on a DCH or a CCH. This procedure takes the RRC

connection set up on the DCH as an example.l If IP transport is applied to the Iub interface, no ALCAP procedure is performed on the Iub

interface after radio links are set up or deleted.

4.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Location UpdateProcedure

The signaling tracing function of the RNC LMT can be used to trace the signaling procedure ofa location update.

Prerequisitel The RNC LMT works properly.

l You are logged in to the RNC as a user authorized to perform tracing management.

ContextTable 4-1 lists the messages to be traced.

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 4 Location Update Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-3

Page 48: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Table 4-1 Messages to be traced

Interfaceand Protocolto Be Traced

Message Name on the LMT Message Name in Protocols

Uu

RRC_RRC_CONNECT_REQ RRC CONNECTION REQUEST

RRC_RRC_CONN_SETUP RRC CONNECTION SETUP

RRC_RRC_CONN_REJ RRC CONNECTION REJECT

RRC_RRC_CONNECT_SETUP_CMP

RRC CONNECTION SETUPCOMPLETE

RRC_INIT_DIRECT_TRANSF INITIAL DIRECT TRANSFER

RRC_DL_DIRECT_TRANSF DOWNLINK DIRECT TRANSFER

RRC_UL_DIR_TRANSF UPLINK DIRECT TRANSFER

RRC_RRC_CONN_REL RRC CONNECTION RELEASE

RRC_RRC_CONN_REL_CMP

RRC CONNECTION RELEASECOMPLETE

Iub

NBAP_RL_SETUP_REQ RADIO LINK SETUP REQUEST

NBAP_RL_SETUP_RSP RADIO LINK SETUP RESPONSE

NBAP_RL_SETUP_FAIL RADIO LINK SETUP FAILURE

NBAP_RL_RESTORE_IND RADIO LINK RESTORE INDICATION

NBAP_RL_DEL_REQ RADIO LINK DELETION REQUEST

NBAP_RL_DEL_RSP RADIO LINK DELETION RESPONSE

Iu

RANAP_INITIAL_UE_MESSAGE INITIAL UE MESSAGE

RANAP_COMMON_ID COMMON ID

RANAP_DIRECT_TRANSFER DIRECT TRANSFER

RANAP_IU_RELEASE_COMMAND IU RELEASE COMMAND

RANAP_IU_RELEASE_COMPLETE IU RELEASE COMPLETE

Procedure

Step 1 Create a Uu tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task.Figure 4-2 shows an example of Uu signaling tracing result.

4 Location Update ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

4-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 49: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Figure 4-2 Example of Uu signaling tracing result

Step 2 Create an Iub tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task.Figure 4-3 shows an example of Iub signaling tracing result.

Figure 4-3 Example of Iub signaling tracing result

Step 3 Create an Iu tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task.Figure 4-4 shows an example of Iu signaling tracing result.

Figure 4-4 Example of Iu signaling tracing result

----End

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 4 Location Update Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-5

Page 50: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

4.5 Elementary Procedures of Location UpdateThis describes the elementary procedures of location update in terms of triggering conditionsand signaling procedures in normal and abnormal conditions.

4.5.1 RRC Connection Setup ProcedureThe RRC connection setup procedure is performed for the UE to set up a signaling connectionto the SRNC. RRC connection setup is always initiated by the UE. One UE has a maximum ofone RRC connection at a time.

4.5.2 Location Update ProcedureThe location update procedure is performed to update the location of a UE.

4.5.3 Iu Release ProcedureThe Iu release procedure is performed for the CN to release an Iu connection and all the UTRANresources related only to that Iu connection.

4.5.4 RRC Connection Release ProcedureThe RRC connection release procedure is performed to release the signaling connection and allradio bearers between the UE and the UTRAN.

4.5.1 RRC Connection Setup ProcedureThe RRC connection setup procedure is performed for the UE to set up a signaling connectionto the SRNC. RRC connection setup is always initiated by the UE. One UE has a maximum ofone RRC connection at a time.

Triggering ConditionsThe UE in idle mode initiates the RRC connection setup procedure when the NAS of the UErequests the establishment of a signaling connection.

ProcedureWhen the SRNC receives an RRC CONNECTION REQUEST message from the UE, the RadioResource Management (RRM) module of the RNC determines whether to accept or reject theRRC connection request, based on a specific algorithm. If accepting the request, the RRMmodule further determines whether to set up the RRC connection on a Dedicated Channel (DCH)or on a Common Channel (CCH), based on a specific RRM algorithm. Typically, an RRCconnection is set up on the DCH.

Figure 4-5 shows the procedure for setting up an RRC connection on a DCH.

4 Location Update ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

4-6 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 51: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Figure 4-5 RRC connection setup procedure on a DCH

The procedure shown in Figure 4-5 is described as follows:

1. The UE sends an RRC CONNECTION REQUEST message to the SRNC through theuplink CCCH, requesting the establishment of an RRC connection.

2. Based on the cause in the RRC connection request and the system resource status, the SRNCdetermines to set up the RRC connection on a DCH and allocates the Radio NetworkTemporary Identity (RNTI), radio resources, and L1 and L2 resources. Then the SRNCsends a RADIO LINK SETUP REQUEST message to the NodeB, requesting the NodeBto allocate the specific radio link resources required for an RRC connection.

3. The NodeB responds with a RADIO LINK SETUP RESPONSE message to the SRNCafter successfully preparing the resources.

4. The SRNC uses the ALCAP protocol to set up the Iub user plane transport bearer andperforms the synchronization between the SRNC and the NodeB. This procedure isoptional. It is required for the ATM-based Iub interface only.

5. The SRNC sends an RRC CONNECTION SETUP message to the UE through the downlinkCCCH. The message contains the information about the DCH allocated by the SRNC.

6. The UE sends an RRC CONNECTION SETUP COMPLETE message to the SRNCthrough the uplink Dedicated Control Channel (DCCH) that is just set up. The messageindicates that the RRC connection setup procedure ends.

Figure 4-6 shows the procedure for setting up an RRC connection on a CCH.

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 4 Location Update Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-7

Page 52: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Figure 4-6 RRC connection setup procedure on a CCH

The procedure shown in Figure 4-6 is described as follows:

1. The UE sends an RRC CONNECTION REQUEST message to the SRNC through theuplink CCCH, requesting the establishment of an RRC connection.

2. Based on the cause in the RRC connection request and the system resource status, the SRNCdetermines to set up the RRC connection on a CCH. The SRNC maps the logical channelof the UE onto a specific CCH in the cell. The SRNC then sends an RRC CONNECTIONSETUP message to the UE through the downlink CCCH. The message contains theinformation about the CCH.

3. The UE sends an RRC CONNECTION SETUP COMPLETE message to the SRNCthrough the uplink CCCH. The message indicates that the RRC connection setup procedureends.

Figure 4-7 shows the RRC connection rejected procedure.

Figure 4-7 RRC connection rejected procedure

The procedure shown in Figure 4-7 is described as follows:

1. The UE sends an RRC CONNECTION REQUEST message to the SRNC through theuplink CCCH, requesting the establishment of an RRC connection.

2. The SRNC determines to reject the RRC connection request, based on a specific algorithm.Then, the SRNC sends an RRC CONNECTION REJECT message to the UE. The messageindicates the reason for rejecting the RRC connection request.

4 Location Update ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

4-8 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 53: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

4.5.2 Location Update ProcedureThe location update procedure is performed to update the location of a UE.

Triggering ConditionsAn RRC connection is set up between the UE and the Serving RNC (SRNC).

ProcedureFigure 4-8 shows the location update procedure.

Figure 4-8 Location update procedure

The procedure shown in Figure 4-8 is described as follows:

1. The UE sends an INITIAL DIRECT TRANSFER message to the SRNC through the RRCconnection. The message contains the Non Access Stratum (NAS) information to be sentto the CN by the UE.

2. The SRNC sends an INITIAL UE MESSAGE to the CS service domain of the CN throughthe Iu interface. The message indicates LOCATION UPDATE REQUEST and containsthe UE information, such as the Temporary Mobile Subscriber Identity (TMSI),International Mobile Subscriber Identity (IMSI), and Location Area Identity (LAI).The SRNC sends an INITIAL UE MESSAGE to the PS service domain of the CN throughthe Iu interface for routing area update. The message indicates ATTACH REQUEST andcontains the Routing Area Identity (RAI)

3. The CN updates the location area information of the UE and saves the new LAI. The CNmight also perform authentication and ciphering. Then, the CN sends a DIRECTTRANSFER message to the SRNC. The message indicates LOCATION UPDATEACCEPT and contains the TMSI that is assigned to the UE.

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 4 Location Update Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-9

Page 54: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

For routing area update, the CN updates the routing area information of the UE and savesthe new RAI. The CN might also perform authentication and ciphering. Then, the CN sendsa DIRECT TRANSFER message to the SRNC. The message indicates ATTACH ACCEPTand contains the TMSI that is assigned to the UE

4. The SRNC transparently sends the contents of the DIRECT TRANSFER message to theUE through a DOWNLINK DIRECT TRANSFER message.

5. The UE receives the LOCATION UPDATE ACCEPT information and sends an UPLINKDIRECT TRANSFER message to the SRNC. The message contains the information suchas the NAS information and the CN ID.For routing area update, it is the ATTACH ACCEPT information that the UE receives.

6. The SRNC transparently sends the contents of the UPLINK DIRECT TRANSFER messageto the CN through a DIRECT TRANSFER message. The DIRECT TRANSFER messageindicates TMSI REALLOCATION COMPLETE.For routing area update, it is ATTACH COMPLETE that the DIRECT TRANSFERmessage indicates.

4.5.3 Iu Release ProcedureThe Iu release procedure is performed for the CN to release an Iu connection and all the UTRANresources related only to that Iu connection.

Triggering ConditionsThe Iu release procedure can be triggered in one of the following conditions:l The transaction between the UE and the CN is complete.l The UTRAN requests the CN to release the resources on the Iu interface by, for example,

sending an IU RELEASE REQUEST message.l The Serving Radio Network Subsystem (SRNS) is relocated.l The SRNS relocation is canceled after a relocation resource allocation procedure is

complete.

ProcedureFigure 4-9 shows the Iu release procedure.

Figure 4-9 Iu release procedure

4 Location Update ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

4-10 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 55: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

The procedure shown in Figure 4-9 is described as follows:

1. The CN sends an IU RELEASE COMMAND message to the SRNC to initiate the Iu releaseprocedure. The message indicates the cause for the release of the signaling connection.

NOTE

After sending the IU RELEASE COMMAND message, the CN will not send further RANAPconnection-oriented messages on this particular connection.

2. The SRNC releases the related UTRAN resources and then sends an IU RELEASECOMPLETE message to the CN.

4.5.4 RRC Connection Release ProcedureThe RRC connection release procedure is performed to release the signaling connection and allradio bearers between the UE and the UTRAN.

Triggering ConditionsAfter an RAB is released, the SRNC judges whether the RRC connection carries any other RABof the UE. If judging that the RRC connection does not carry any other RAB of the UE, theSRNC initiates an RRC connection release procedure.

ProcedureBased on the resource occupied by the RRC connection, there are two types of RRC connectionrelease procedure: release of an RRC connection from a DCH and release of an RRC connectionfrom a CCH.

NOTE

If an RRC connection needs to be released after a successful outgoing call, the RRC connection on theDCH is released. If a radio bearer fails to be set up, the RRC connection on the CCH is released.

I. Releasing an RRC Connection from a DCH

Figure 4-10 shows the procedure for releasing an RRC connection from a DCH.

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 4 Location Update Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-11

Page 56: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Figure 4-10 RRC connection release procedure (from a DCH)

The procedure shown in Figure 4-10 is described as follows:

1. The SRNC sends an RRC CONNECTION RELEASE message to the UE through theDCCH.

NOTE

The SRNC may send the RRC CONNECTION RELEASE message several times to increase theprobability of proper reception of the message by the UE. The RRC SNs of these messages are thesame. The number of retransmissions and the transmission intervals are determined by the SRNC. Ifthe SRNC does not receive an RRC CONNECTION RELEASE COMPLETE message from the UEafter sending the RRC CONNECTION RELEASE message for four times, the SRNC judges that theUE has released the RRC connection.

2. The UE sends an RRC CONNECTION RELEASE COMPLETE message to the SRNC.3. The SRNC sends a RADIO LINK DELETION REQUEST message to the NodeB,

requesting the NodeB to delete the radio link resources in the NodeB.4. After releasing the resources, the NodeB sends a RADIO LINK DELETION RESPONSE

message to the SRNC.5. (Optional; required for the ATM-based Iub interface only) The SRNC uses the ALCAP

protocol to initiate an Iub user plane transport bearer release procedure. Then, the RRCconnection release procedure ends.

II. Releasing an RRC Connection from a CCH

Figure 4-11 shows the procedure for releasing an RRC connection from a CCH.

4 Location Update ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

4-12 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 57: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Figure 4-11 RRC connection release procedure (from a CCH)

The procedure shown in Figure 4-11 is described as follows:

1. The SRNC sends an RRC CONNECTION RELEASE message to the UE through theCCCH.

2. The UE sends an RRC CONNECTION RELEASE COMPLETE message to the SRNC.

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 4 Location Update Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-13

Page 58: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)
Page 59: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

5 Outgoing Call Procedure

About This Chapter

The outgoing call procedure is performed for a UE to call another terminal, such as a PublicSwitched Telephony Network (PSTN) terminal. This topic describes outgoing call setup andrelease in terms of protocols, triggering conditions, signaling procedure of a successful outgoingcall, and signaling tracing on the RNC LMT. This topic also describes the elementary proceduresin terms of functions, triggering conditions, and signaling in normal and abnormal conditions.

5.1 Protocols Related to an Outgoing CallThe outgoing call procedure complies with some 3GPP TS25 protocols and an ITU-T protocol.

5.2 Triggering Conditions of an Outgoing CallAn outgoing call is made by a UE when the UE calls another terminal.

5.3 Signaling Procedure of a Successful Outgoing CallThis describes the signaling procedure of a successful outgoing call. For the messages relatedto outgoing call failures, refer to the elementary procedures.

5.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Outgoing Call ProcedureThe signaling tracing function of the RNC LMT can be used to trace the signaling procedure ofan outgoing call.

5.5 Elementary Procedures of an Outgoing CallThis describes the elementary procedures of an outgoing call in terms of triggering conditionsand signaling procedures in normal and abnormal conditions.

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 5 Outgoing Call Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-1

Page 60: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

5.1 Protocols Related to an Outgoing CallThe outgoing call procedure complies with some 3GPP TS25 protocols and an ITU-T protocol.

The compliance protocols are as follows:l 3GPP TS25.331 "Radio Resource Control (RRC)"

l 3GPP TS25.413 "UTRAN Iu interface RANAP signalling"

l 3GPP TS25.433 "UTRAN Iub interface Node B Application Part (NBAP) signalling"

l ITU-T Q.2630 "AAL type 2 Signalling Protocol"

5.2 Triggering Conditions of an Outgoing CallAn outgoing call is made by a UE when the UE calls another terminal.

Therefore, the triggering condition is that a UE calls a mobile phone or fixed-line phone whenthe UE camps on a cell.

5.3 Signaling Procedure of a Successful Outgoing CallThis describes the signaling procedure of a successful outgoing call. For the messages relatedto outgoing call failures, refer to the elementary procedures.

Figure 5-1 shows the signaling procedure of a successful outgoing call.

5 Outgoing Call ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

5-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 61: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Figure 5-1 Signaling procedure of a successful outgoing call

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 5 Outgoing Call Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-3

Page 62: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Note the following information about the procedure shown in Figure 5-1:

l The RRC connection can be set up on a DCH or a CCH. This procedure takes the RRCconnection set up on the DCH as an example.

l If IP transport is applied to the Iub interface, no ALCAP procedure is performed on the Iubinterface after radio links are set up, reconfigured, or deleted.

l If IP transport is applied to the Iu-CS interface, no ALCAP procedure is performed on theIu-CS interface after an RAB is set up or a call is released.

5.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Outgoing CallProcedure

The signaling tracing function of the RNC LMT can be used to trace the signaling procedure ofan outgoing call.

Prerequisitel The RNC LMT works properly.

l You are logged in to the RNC as a user authorized to perform tracing management.

Context

Table 5-1 lists the messages to be traced.

Table 5-1 Messages to be traced

Interfaceand Protocolto Be Traced

Message Name on the LMT Message Name in Protocols

Uu

RRC_RRC_CONNECT_REQ RRC CONNECTION REQUEST

RRC_RRC_CONN_SETUP RRC CONNECTION SETUP

RRC_RRC_CONN_REJ RRC CONNECTION REJECT

RRC_RRC_CONNECT_SETUP_CMP

RRC CONNECTION SETUPCOMPLETE

RRC_INIT_DIRECT_TRANSF INITIAL DIRECT TRANSFER

RRC_DL_DIRECT_TRANSF DOWNLINK DIRECT TRANSFER

RRC_UL_DIR_TRANSF UPLINK DIRECT TRANSFER

RRC_SECURITY_MODE_CMD SECURITY MODE COMMAND

RRC_SECURITY_MODE_CMP SECURITY MODE COMPLETE

5 Outgoing Call ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

5-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 63: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Interfaceand Protocolto Be Traced

Message Name on the LMT Message Name in Protocols

RRC_SECURITY_MODE_FAIL SECURITY MODE FAILURE

RRC_RB_SETUP RADIO BEARER SETUP

RRC_RB_SETUP_CMP RADIO BEARER SETUP COMPLETE

RRC_RB_SETUP_FAIL RADIO BEARER SETUP FAILURE

RRC_RRC_CONN_REL RRC CONNECTION RELEASE

RRC_RRC_CONN_REL_CMP

RRC CONNECTION RELEASECOMPLETE

Iub

NBAP_RL_SETUP_REQ RADIO LINK SETUP REQUEST

NBAP_RL_SETUP_RSP RADIO LINK SETUP RESPONSE

NBAP_RL_SETUP_FAIL RADIO LINK SETUP FAILURE

NBAP_RL_RESTORE_IND RADIO LINK RESTORE INDICATION

NBAP_RL_RECFG_PREP RADIO LINK RECONFIGURATIONPREPARE

NBAP_RL_RECFG_REDAY RADIO LINK RECONFIGURATIONREADY

NBAP_RL_RECFG_FAIL RADIO LINK RECONFIGURATIONFAILURE

NBAP_RL_RECFG_COMMIT

RADIO LINK RECONFIGURATIONCOMMIT

NBAP_RL_RECFG_CANCEL

RADIO LINK RECONFIGURATIONCANCEL

NBAP_RL_DEL_REQ RADIO LINK DELETION REQUEST

NBAP_RL_DEL_RSP RADIO LINK DELETION RESPONSE

Iu

RANAP_INITIAL_UE_MESSAGE INITIAL UE MESSAGE

RANAP_COMMON_ID COMMON ID

RANAP_DIRECT_TRANSFER DIRECT TRANSFER

RANAP_SECURITY_MODE_COMMAND SECURITY MODE COMMAND

RANAP_SECURITY_MODE_COMPLETE SECURITY MODE COMPLETE

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 5 Outgoing Call Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-5

Page 64: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Interfaceand Protocolto Be Traced

Message Name on the LMT Message Name in Protocols

RANAP_SECURITY_MODE_REJ SECURITY MODE REJECT

RANAP_RAB_ASSIGNMENT_REQ RAB ASSIGNMENT REQUEST

RANAP_RAB_ASSIGNMENT_RESP RAB ASSIGNMENT RESPONSE

RANAP_IU_RELEASE_COMMAND IU RELEASE COMMAND

RANAP_IU_RELEASE_COMPLETE IU RELEASE COMPLETE

Procedure

Step 1 Create a Uu tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task.Figure 5-2 shows an example of Uu signaling tracing result.

Figure 5-2 Example of Uu signaling tracing result

As shown in Figure 5-2, multiple RRC_UL_DIR_TRANSF messages andRRC_DL_DIRECT_TRANSF messages are traced. That is because the UE and the RNCexchange signaling several times during the outgoing call procedure. TheRRC_UL_DIR_TRANSF messages have different contents, and so do theRRC_DL_DIRECT_TRANSF messages.

Step 2 Create an Iub tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task.Figure 5-3 shows an example of Iub signaling tracing result.

5 Outgoing Call ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

5-6 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 65: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Figure 5-3 Example of Iub signaling tracing result

Step 3 Create an Iu tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task.Figure 5-4 shows an example of Iu signaling tracing result.

Figure 5-4 Example of Iu signaling tracing result

As shown in Figure 5-4, multiple RANAP_DIRECT_TRANSFER messages are traced. Thatis because the RNC and the CN exchange signaling several times during the outgoing callprocedure. The RANAP_DIRECT_TRANSFER messages have different contents.

----End

5.5 Elementary Procedures of an Outgoing CallThis describes the elementary procedures of an outgoing call in terms of triggering conditionsand signaling procedures in normal and abnormal conditions.

5.5.1 RRC Connection Setup ProcedureThe RRC connection setup procedure is performed for the UE to set up a signaling connectionto the SRNC. RRC connection setup is always initiated by the UE. One UE has a maximum ofone RRC connection at a time.

5.5.2 Signaling Connection Setup Procedure (Outgoing Call)

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 5 Outgoing Call Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-7

Page 66: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

The signaling connection setup procedure is performed to exchange the NAS informationbetween the UE and the CN. The NAS information is related to authentication, service request,connection setup, and so on.

5.5.3 Authentication and Security Mode Control ProcedureThe authentication and security mode control procedure is performed for the UE and the networkto implement bi-directional authentication and to negotiate and configure the integrity protectionalgorithm and ciphering algorithm. This procedure ensures integrity and correctness of signaling.

5.5.4 Call Setup Procedure (Outgoing Call)The call setup procedure is performed to set up a call.

5.5.5 RAB Setup ProcedureThe RAB setup procedure is performed to set up a user plane bearer.

5.5.6 Call Release Procedure (Outgoing Call)The call release procedure is performed to release services and resources after a call ends.

5.5.7 RRC Connection Release ProcedureThe RRC connection release procedure is performed to release the signaling connection and allradio bearers between the UE and the UTRAN.

5.5.1 RRC Connection Setup ProcedureThe RRC connection setup procedure is performed for the UE to set up a signaling connectionto the SRNC. RRC connection setup is always initiated by the UE. One UE has a maximum ofone RRC connection at a time.

Triggering ConditionsThe UE in idle mode initiates the RRC connection setup procedure when the NAS of the UErequests the establishment of a signaling connection.

ProcedureWhen the SRNC receives an RRC CONNECTION REQUEST message from the UE, the RadioResource Management (RRM) module of the RNC determines whether to accept or reject theRRC connection request, based on a specific algorithm. If accepting the request, the RRMmodule further determines whether to set up the RRC connection on a Dedicated Channel (DCH)or on a Common Channel (CCH), based on a specific RRM algorithm. Typically, an RRCconnection is set up on the DCH.

Figure 5-5 shows the procedure for setting up an RRC connection on a DCH.

5 Outgoing Call ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

5-8 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 67: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Figure 5-5 RRC connection setup procedure on a DCH

The procedure shown in Figure 5-5 is described as follows:

1. The UE sends an RRC CONNECTION REQUEST message to the SRNC through theuplink CCCH, requesting the establishment of an RRC connection.

2. Based on the cause in the RRC connection request and the system resource status, the SRNCdetermines to set up the RRC connection on a DCH and allocates the Radio NetworkTemporary Identity (RNTI), radio resources, and L1 and L2 resources. Then the SRNCsends a RADIO LINK SETUP REQUEST message to the NodeB, requesting the NodeBto allocate the specific radio link resources required for an RRC connection.

3. The NodeB responds with a RADIO LINK SETUP RESPONSE message to the SRNCafter successfully preparing the resources.

4. The SRNC uses the ALCAP protocol to set up the Iub user plane transport bearer andperforms the synchronization between the SRNC and the NodeB. This procedure isoptional. It is required for the ATM-based Iub interface only.

5. The SRNC sends an RRC CONNECTION SETUP message to the UE through the downlinkCCCH. The message contains the information about the DCH allocated by the SRNC.

6. The UE sends an RRC CONNECTION SETUP COMPLETE message to the SRNCthrough the uplink Dedicated Control Channel (DCCH) that is just set up. The messageindicates that the RRC connection setup procedure ends.

Figure 5-6 shows the procedure for setting up an RRC connection on a CCH.

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 5 Outgoing Call Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-9

Page 68: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Figure 5-6 RRC connection setup procedure on a CCH

The procedure shown in Figure 5-6 is described as follows:

1. The UE sends an RRC CONNECTION REQUEST message to the SRNC through theuplink CCCH, requesting the establishment of an RRC connection.

2. Based on the cause in the RRC connection request and the system resource status, the SRNCdetermines to set up the RRC connection on a CCH. The SRNC maps the logical channelof the UE onto a specific CCH in the cell. The SRNC then sends an RRC CONNECTIONSETUP message to the UE through the downlink CCCH. The message contains theinformation about the CCH.

3. The UE sends an RRC CONNECTION SETUP COMPLETE message to the SRNCthrough the uplink CCCH. The message indicates that the RRC connection setup procedureends.

Figure 5-7 shows the RRC connection rejected procedure.

Figure 5-7 RRC connection rejected procedure

The procedure shown in Figure 5-7 is described as follows:

1. The UE sends an RRC CONNECTION REQUEST message to the SRNC through theuplink CCCH, requesting the establishment of an RRC connection.

2. The SRNC determines to reject the RRC connection request, based on a specific algorithm.Then, the SRNC sends an RRC CONNECTION REJECT message to the UE. The messageindicates the reason for rejecting the RRC connection request.

5 Outgoing Call ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

5-10 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 69: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

5.5.2 Signaling Connection Setup Procedure (Outgoing Call)The signaling connection setup procedure is performed to exchange the NAS informationbetween the UE and the CN. The NAS information is related to authentication, service request,connection setup, and so on.

Triggering ConditionsThe UE sends a direct transfer message to initiate the signaling connection setup procedure.

ProcedureFigure 5-8 shows the signaling connection setup procedure.

Figure 5-8 Signaling connection setup procedure

The procedure shown in Figure 5-8 is described as follows:

1. The UE sends an INITIAL DIRECT TRANSFER message to the SRNC through the RRCconnection. The message contains the initial NAS information to be sent to the CN by theUE.

2. The SRNC receives the INITIAL DIRECT TRANSFER message from the UE and sendsan INITIAL UE MESSAGE to the CN over the Iu interface. The INITIAL UE MESSAGEcontains the NAS information to be sent to the CN by the UE. The content of the NASinformation is CM SERVICE REQUEST.

3. The CN sends a response message to the SRNC.l If accepting the request, the CN sends a CONNECTION CONFIRM (CC) message to

the SRNC. The message indicates that the SCCP connection is set up. After receivingthe message, the SRNC confirms that the signaling connection is set up.

l If rejecting the request, the CN sends a CONNECTION REJECT (CJ) message to theSRNC. The message indicates that the SCCP connection fails to be set up. Afterreceiving the message, the SRNC confirms that the signaling connection fails to be setup and then initiates the RRC release procedure.

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 5 Outgoing Call Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-11

Page 70: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

5.5.3 Authentication and Security Mode Control ProcedureThe authentication and security mode control procedure is performed for the UE and the networkto implement bi-directional authentication and to negotiate and configure the integrity protectionalgorithm and ciphering algorithm. This procedure ensures integrity and correctness of signaling.

Triggering ConditionsThe UE and the CN exchange signaling. The network initiates the authentication and securitymode control procedure.

ProcedureFigure 5-9 shows the authentication and security mode control procedure.

Figure 5-9 Authentication and security mode control procedure

The procedure shown in Figure 5-9 is described as follows:

1. The CN sends a DIRECT TRANSFER message to the SRNC. The message indicatesAUTHENTICATION REQUEST.

2. The SRNC transparently sends the contents of the DIRECT TRANSFER message to theUE through a DOWNLINK DIRECT TRANSFER message.

3. The UE sends an UPLINK DIRECT TRANSFER message to the SRNC.4. The SRNC transparently sends the contents of the UPLINK DIRECT TRANSFER message

to the CN through a DIRECT TRANSFER message, indicating AUTHENTICATION

5 Outgoing Call ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

5-12 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 71: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

RESPONSE. If the UMTS Subscriber Identity Module (USIM) judges that theauthentication is successful, the UE returns a message with an XRES IE.

5. The CN sends a SECURITY MODE COMMAND message to the SRNC to initiate thesecurity mode control procedure. The message contains the information about the supportedciphering and integrity protection algorithms.

6. The SRNC sends a SECURITY MODE COMMAND message to the UE to inform the UEof the integrity protection and ciphering algorithms that the UTRAN selects.

7. The UE sends a response message to the SRNC.l If the integrity protection and ciphering algorithms are configured successfully, the UE

sends a SECURITY MODE COMMAND COMPLETE message to the SRNC. TheSRNC then sends a SECURITY MODE COMMAND COMPLETE message to the CN.The message contains the information about the integrity protection and cipheringalgorithms that the UE uses.

l If the UE does not support the integrity protection and ciphering algorithms, the UEsends a SECURITY MODE COMMAND FAILURE message to the SRNC. Themessage contains the error information and the reason for the failure. The SRNC thensends a SECURITY MODE COMMAND REJECT message to the CN.

5.5.4 Call Setup Procedure (Outgoing Call)The call setup procedure is performed to set up a call.

Triggering ConditionsThe UE initiates a call.

ProcedureFigure 5-10 shows the call setup procedure.

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 5 Outgoing Call Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-13

Page 72: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Figure 5-10 Call setup procedure (outgoing call)

The procedure shown in Figure 5-10 is described as follows:

1. The UE sends an UPLINK DIRECT TRANSFER message to the SRNC. The messagecontains the number of the called party and the information about the bearer capability ofthe call.

2. The SRNC transparently sends the contents of the UPLINK DIRECT TRANSFER messageto the CN through a DIRECT TRANSFER message.

3. The CN sends a DIRECT TRANSFER message to the SRNC. The message indicates CALLPROCEEDING and contains the information about the negotiated bearer capability of thecall.

4. The SRNC transparently sends the contents of the DIRECT TRANSFER message to theUE through a DOWNLINK DIRECT TRANSFER message.

5. A Radio Access Bearer (RAB) is set up. For details, refer to 5.5.5 RAB SetupProcedure.

6. When the called terminal rings, the CN sends a DIRECT TRANSFER message to theSRNC. The message indicates ALERTING.

7. The SRNC transparently sends the contents of the DIRECT TRANSFER message to theUE through a DOWNLINK DIRECT TRANSFER message.

8. The CN sends a DIRECT TRANSFER message to the SRNC. The message indicatesCONNECT, which means that the called party has answered the call.

9. The SRNC transparently sends the contents of the DIRECT TRANSFER message to theUE through a DOWNLINK DIRECT TRANSFER message.

5 Outgoing Call ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

5-14 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 73: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

10. The UE sends an UPLINK DIRECT TRANSFER message to the SRNC.11. The SRNC transparently sends the contents of the UPLINK DIRECT TRANSFER message

to the CN through a DIRECT TRANSFER message, indicating CONNECTACKNOWLEDGE.

The call is set up. The calling and called parties begin the conversation.

5.5.5 RAB Setup ProcedureThe RAB setup procedure is performed to set up a user plane bearer.

Triggering Conditions

A call is set up.

Procedure

I. Setting Up an RAB Successfully

Figure 5-11 shows the successful RAB setup procedure.

Figure 5-11 Successful RAB setup procedure

The procedure shown in Figure 5-11 is described as follows:

1. The CN sends an RAB ASSIGNMENT REQUEST message to the SRNC to initiate theRAB setup procedure.

2. (Optional; applicable to the ATM-based Iu-CS interface only) The SRNC maps the Qualityof Service (QoS) parameters for the RAB to the AAL2 link characteristic parameters andradio resource characteristic parameters. Based on the AAL2 link characteristic parameters,the ALCAP on the Iu interface initiates an Iu user plane transport bearer setup procedure.

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 5 Outgoing Call Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-15

Page 74: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

3. The SRNC sends a RADIO LINK RECONFIGURATION PREPARE message to theNodeB, requesting the NodeB to prepare for adding one or more DCHs to the existing radiolinks for carrying the RAB.

4. The NodeB allocates the associated resources and then sends a RADIO LINKRECONFIGURATION READY message to the SRNC.

5. (Optional; required for the ATM-based Iub interface only) The Iub ALCAP at the SRNCinitiates an Iub user plane transport bearer setup procedure. The NodeB and the SRNCperform synchronization by exchanging uplink and downlink synchronization frames inthe DCH frame protocol.

6. The SRNC sends a RADIO BEARER SETUP message to the UE.7. The SRNC sends a RADIO LINK RECONFIGURATION COMMIT message to the

NodeB.8. After performing the radio bearer setup, the UE sends a RADIO BEARER SETUP

COMPLETE message to the SRNC.9. The SRNC sends an RAB ASSIGNMENT RESPONSE message to the CN. The RAB is

set up.

II. Failing to Set Up an RAB

Figure 5-12 shows the unsuccessful RAB setup procedure.

Figure 5-12 Unsuccessful RAB setup procedure

The procedure shown in Figure 5-12 is described as follows:

1. The CN sends an RAB ASSIGNMENT REQUEST message to the SRNC to initiate theRAB setup procedure.

2. The SRNC sends an RAB ASSIGNMENT RESPONSE message to the CN. The messageindicates the ID of the RAB that fails to be set up and the reason for the failure.

5.5.6 Call Release Procedure (Outgoing Call)The call release procedure is performed to release services and resources after a call ends.

Triggering ConditionsA call ends and the calling party hangs up.

5 Outgoing Call ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

5-16 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 75: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

ProcedureFigure 5-13 shows the call release procedure.

Figure 5-13 Call release procedure (outgoing call)

The procedure shown in Figure 5-13 is described as follows:

1. The UE sends an UPLINK DIRECT TRANSFER message to the SRNC.2. The SRNC transparently sends the contents of the UPLINK DIRECT TRANSFER message

to the CN through a DIRECT TRANSFER message, indicating DISCONNECT. Thiscontent informs the CN that the UE has hanged up.

3. The CN sends a DIRECT TRANSFER message to the SRNC. The message indicatesRELEASE to request release of the call.

4. The SRNC transparently sends the contents of the DIRECT TRANSFER message to theUE through a DOWNLINK DIRECT TRANSFER message.

5. The UE sends an UPLINK DIRECT TRANSFER message to the SRNC.6. The SRNC transparently sends the contents of the UPLINK DIRECT TRANSFER message

to the CN through a DIRECT TRANSFER message, indicating RELEASE COMPLETE.7. The CN sends an IU RELEASE COMMAND message to the SRNC to request call release

on the Iu interface. The message indicates the reason for the Iu release.8. (Optional; applicable to the ATM-based Iu-CS interface only) The ALCAP protocol on the

Iu interface initiates an Iu data transport bearer release procedure.9. The SRNC sends an IU RELEASE COMPLETE message to the CN.

5.5.7 RRC Connection Release ProcedureThe RRC connection release procedure is performed to release the signaling connection and allradio bearers between the UE and the UTRAN.

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 5 Outgoing Call Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-17

Page 76: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Triggering Conditions

After an RAB is released, the SRNC judges whether the RRC connection carries any other RABof the UE. If judging that the RRC connection does not carry any other RAB of the UE, theSRNC initiates an RRC connection release procedure.

Procedure

Based on the resource occupied by the RRC connection, there are two types of RRC connectionrelease procedure: release of an RRC connection from a DCH and release of an RRC connectionfrom a CCH.

NOTE

If an RRC connection needs to be released after a successful outgoing call, the RRC connection on theDCH is released. If a radio bearer fails to be set up, the RRC connection on the CCH is released.

I. Releasing an RRC Connection from a DCH

Figure 5-14 shows the procedure for releasing an RRC connection from a DCH.

Figure 5-14 RRC connection release procedure (from a DCH)

The procedure shown in Figure 5-14 is described as follows:

1. The SRNC sends an RRC CONNECTION RELEASE message to the UE through theDCCH.

NOTE

The SRNC may send the RRC CONNECTION RELEASE message several times to increase theprobability of proper reception of the message by the UE. The RRC SNs of these messages are thesame. The number of retransmissions and the transmission intervals are determined by the SRNC. Ifthe SRNC does not receive an RRC CONNECTION RELEASE COMPLETE message from the UEafter sending the RRC CONNECTION RELEASE message for four times, the SRNC judges that theUE has released the RRC connection.

5 Outgoing Call ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

5-18 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 77: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

2. The UE sends an RRC CONNECTION RELEASE COMPLETE message to the SRNC.3. The SRNC sends a RADIO LINK DELETION REQUEST message to the NodeB,

requesting the NodeB to delete the radio link resources in the NodeB.4. After releasing the resources, the NodeB sends a RADIO LINK DELETION RESPONSE

message to the SRNC.5. (Optional; required for the ATM-based Iub interface only) The SRNC uses the ALCAP

protocol to initiate an Iub user plane transport bearer release procedure. Then, the RRCconnection release procedure ends.

II. Releasing an RRC Connection from a CCH

Figure 5-15 shows the procedure for releasing an RRC connection from a CCH.

Figure 5-15 RRC connection release procedure (from a CCH)

The procedure shown in Figure 5-15 is described as follows:

1. The SRNC sends an RRC CONNECTION RELEASE message to the UE through theCCCH.

2. The UE sends an RRC CONNECTION RELEASE COMPLETE message to the SRNC.

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 5 Outgoing Call Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-19

Page 78: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)
Page 79: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

6 Incoming Call Procedure

About This Chapter

In the incoming call procedure, the network calls a UE and the UE responds to the paging. Thistopic describes incoming call setup and release in terms of protocols, triggering conditions,signaling procedure of a successful incoming call, and signaling tracing on the RNC LMT. Thistopic also describes the elementary procedures in terms of functions, triggering conditions, andsignaling in normal and abnormal conditions.

6.1 Protocols Related to an Incoming CallThe incoming call procedure complies with some 3GPP TS25 protocols.

6.2 Triggering Conditions of an Incoming CallAn incoming call is received by a UE when a mobile phone or fixed-line phone calls the UE.

6.3 Signaling Procedure of a Successful Incoming CallThis describes the signaling procedure of a successful incoming call. For the messages relatedto incoming call failures, refer to the elementary procedures.

6.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Incoming Call ProcedureThe signaling tracing function of the RNC LMT can be used to trace the signaling procedure ofan incoming call.

6.5 Elementary Procedures of an Incoming CallThis describes the elementary procedures of an incoming call in terms of triggering conditionsand signaling procedures in normal and abnormal conditions.

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 6 Incoming Call Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-1

Page 80: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

6.1 Protocols Related to an Incoming CallThe incoming call procedure complies with some 3GPP TS25 protocols.

The compliance protocols are as follows:l 3GPP TS25.331 "Radio Resource Control (RRC)"

l 3GPP TS25.413 "UTRAN Iu interface RANAP signalling"

l 3GPP TS25.433 "UTRAN Iub interface Node B Application Part (NBAP) signalling"

6.2 Triggering Conditions of an Incoming CallAn incoming call is received by a UE when a mobile phone or fixed-line phone calls the UE.

Therefore, the triggering condition is that a network pages a UE that camps on a cell.

6.3 Signaling Procedure of a Successful Incoming CallThis describes the signaling procedure of a successful incoming call. For the messages relatedto incoming call failures, refer to the elementary procedures.

Figure 6-1 shows the signaling procedure of a successful incoming call.

6 Incoming Call ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

6-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 81: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Figure 6-1 Signaling procedure of a successful incoming call

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 6 Incoming Call Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-3

Page 82: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Note the following information about the procedure shown in Figure 6-1:l The RRC connection can be set up on a DCH or a CCH. This procedure takes the RRC

connection set up on the DCH as an example.l If IP transport is applied to the Iub interface, no ALCAP procedure is performed on the Iub

interface after radio links are set up, reconfigured, or deleted.l If IP transport is applied to the Iu-CS interface, no ALCAP procedure is performed on the

Iu-CS interface after an RAB is set up or a call is released.

6.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Incoming CallProcedure

The signaling tracing function of the RNC LMT can be used to trace the signaling procedure ofan incoming call.

Prerequisitel The RNC LMT works properly.

l You are logged in to the RNC as a user authorized to perform tracing management.

ContextTable 6-1 lists the messages to be traced.

Table 6-1 Messages to be traced

Interfaceand Protocolto Be Traced

Message Name on the LMT Message Name in Protocols

Uu

RRC_PAGING_TYPE1 PAGING TYPE 1

RRC_PAGING_TYPE2 PAGING TYPE 2

RRC_RRC_CONNECT_REQ RRC CONNECTION REQUEST

RRC_RRC_CONN_SETUP RRC CONNECTION SETUP

RRC_RRC_CONN_REJ RRC CONNECTION REJECT

RRC_RRC_CONNECT_SETUP_CMP

RRC CONNECTION SETUPCOMPLETE

RRC_INIT_DIRECT_TRANSF INITIAL DIRECT TRANSFER

RRC_DL_DIRECT_TRANSF DOWNLINK DIRECT TRANSFER

RRC_UL_DIR_TRANSF UPLINK DIRECT TRANSFER

RRC_SECURITY_MODE_CMD SECURITY MODE COMMAND

6 Incoming Call ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

6-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 83: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Interfaceand Protocolto Be Traced

Message Name on the LMT Message Name in Protocols

RRC_SECURITY_MODE_CMP SECURITY MODE COMPLETE

RRC_SECURITY_MODE_FAIL SECURITY MODE FAILURE

RRC_RB_SETUP RADIO BEARER SETUP

RRC_RB_SETUP_CMP RADIO BEARER SETUP COMPLETE

RRC_RB_SETUP_FAIL RADIO BEARER SETUP FAILURE

RRC_RRC_CONN_REL RRC CONNECTION RELEASE

RRC_RRC_CONN_REL_CMP

RRC CONNECTION RELEASECOMPLETE

Iub

NBAP_RL_SETUP_REQ RADIO LINK SETUP REQUEST

NBAP_RL_SETUP_RSP RADIO LINK SETUP RESPONSE

NBAP_RL_SETUP_FAIL RADIO LINK SETUP FAILURE

NBAP_RL_RESTORE_IND RADIO LINK RESTORE INDICATION

NBAP_RL_RECFG_PREP RADIO LINK RECONFIGURATIONPREPARE

NBAP_RL_RECFG_REDAY RADIO LINK RECONFIGURATIONREADY

NBAP_RL_RECFG_FAIL RADIO LINK RECONFIGURATIONFAILURE

NBAP_RL_RECFG_COMMIT

RADIO LINK RECONFIGURATIONCOMMIT

NBAP_RL_RECFG_CANCEL

RADIO LINK RECONFIGURATIONCANCEL

NBAP_RL_DEL_REQ RADIO LINK DELETION REQUEST

NBAP_RL_DEL_RSP RADIO LINK DELETION RESPONSE

Iu

RANAP_PAGING PAGING

RANAP_INITIAL_UE_MESSAGE INITIAL UE MESSAGE

RANAP_COMMON_ID COMMON ID

RANAP_DIRECT_TRANSFER DIRECT TRANSFER

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 6 Incoming Call Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-5

Page 84: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Interfaceand Protocolto Be Traced

Message Name on the LMT Message Name in Protocols

RANAP_SECURITY_MODE_COMMAND SECURITY MODE COMMAND

RANAP_SECURITY_MODE_COMPLETE SECURITY MODE COMPLETE

RANAP_SECURITY_MODE_REJ SECURITY MODE REJECT

RANAP_RAB_ASSIGNMENT_REQ RAB ASSIGNMENT REQUEST

RANAP_RAB_ASSIGNMENT_RESP RAB ASSIGNMENT RESPONSE

RANAP_IU_RELEASE_COMMAND IU RELEASE COMMAND

RANAP_IU_RELEASE_COMPLETE IU RELEASE COMPLETE

Procedure

Step 1 Create a Uu tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task.Figure 6-2 shows an example of Uu signaling tracing result.

Figure 6-2 Example of Uu signaling tracing result

As shown in Figure 6-2, multiple RRC_UL_DIR_TRANSF messages andRRC_DL_DIRECT_TRANSF messages are traced. That is because the UE and the RNCexchange signaling several times during the incoming call procedure. TheRRC_UL_DIR_TRANSF messages have different contents, and so do theRRC_DL_DIRECT_TRANSF messages.

6 Incoming Call ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

6-6 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 85: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Step 2 Create an Iub tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task.Figure 6-3 shows an example of Iub signaling tracing result.

Figure 6-3 Example of Iub signaling tracing result

Step 3 Create an Iu tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task.Figure 6-4 shows an example of Iu signaling tracing result.

Figure 6-4 Example of Iu signaling tracing result

As shown in Figure 6-4, multiple RANAP_DIRECT_TRANSFER messages are traced. Thatis because the RNC and the CN exchange signaling several times during the incoming callprocedure. The RANAP_DIRECT_TRANSFER messages have different contents.

----End

6.5 Elementary Procedures of an Incoming CallThis describes the elementary procedures of an incoming call in terms of triggering conditionsand signaling procedures in normal and abnormal conditions.

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 6 Incoming Call Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-7

Page 86: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

6.5.1 Paging ProcedureThe paging procedure is performed when the CN calls a UE.

6.5.2 RRC Connection Setup ProcedureThe RRC connection setup procedure is performed for the UE to set up a signaling connectionto the SRNC. RRC connection setup is always initiated by the UE. One UE has a maximum ofone RRC connection at a time.

6.5.3 Signaling Connection Setup Procedure (Incoming Call)The signaling connection setup procedure is performed to exchange the NAS informationbetween the UE and the CN. The NAS information is related to authentication, service request,connection setup, and so on.

6.5.4 Authentication and Security Mode Control ProcedureThe authentication and security mode control procedure is performed for the UE and the networkto implement bi-directional authentication and to negotiate and configure the integrity protectionalgorithm and ciphering algorithm. This procedure ensures integrity and correctness of signaling.

6.5.5 Call Setup Procedure (Incoming Call)The call setup procedure is performed to set up a call.

6.5.6 RAB Setup ProcedureThe RAB setup procedure is performed to set up a user plane bearer.

6.5.7 Call Release Procedure (Incoming Call)The call release procedure is performed to release services and resources after a call ends.

6.5.8 RRC Connection Release ProcedureThe RRC connection release procedure is performed to release the signaling connection and allradio bearers between the UE and the UTRAN.

6.5.1 Paging ProcedureThe paging procedure is performed when the CN calls a UE.

Triggering Conditions

A terminal calls the UE.

Procedure

I. Paging a UE that Is in Idle Mode or in PCH State

Figure 6-5 shows the procedure for paging a UE that is in idle mode or in PCH state.

Figure 6-5 Paging procedure (for a UE that is in idle mode or in PCH state)

6 Incoming Call ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

6-8 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 87: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

The procedure shown in Figure 6-5 is described as follows:

1. The CN sends a PAGING message to the SRNC.2. The SRNC initiates the paging procedure by sending a PAGING TYPE 1 message to the

UE through the Paging Control Channel (PCCH) on an appropriate occasion.

NOTE

The paging occasion is related to the International Mobile Subscriber Identity (IMSI) of the UE. TheUTRAN may page the same UE on several occasions to increase the probability of proper receptionof the paging message by the UE.

3. The UE in idle mode or in PCH state monitors the paging and receives the paging messagefrom the network layer.

The paging procedure ends.

II. Paging a UE that Is in CELL_DCH or CELL_FACH State

Figure 6-6 shows the procedure for paging a UE that is in CELL_DCH or CELL_FACH state.

Figure 6-6 Paging procedure (for a UE that is in CELL_DCH or CELL_FACH state)

The procedure shown in Figure 6-6 is described as follows:

1. The CN sends a PAGING message to the SRNC.2. The SRNC initiates the paging procedure by sending a PAGING TYPE 2 message to the

UE through the DCCH.3. The UE receives the PAGNG TPYE 2 message, reads it, and then reports to the NAS the

information such as the paging cause and the paging record type identifier.

The paging procedure ends.

6.5.2 RRC Connection Setup ProcedureThe RRC connection setup procedure is performed for the UE to set up a signaling connectionto the SRNC. RRC connection setup is always initiated by the UE. One UE has a maximum ofone RRC connection at a time.

Triggering Conditions

The UE in idle mode initiates the RRC connection setup procedure when the NAS of the UErequests the establishment of a signaling connection.

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 6 Incoming Call Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-9

Page 88: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

ProcedureWhen the SRNC receives an RRC CONNECTION REQUEST message from the UE, the RadioResource Management (RRM) module of the RNC determines whether to accept or reject theRRC connection request, based on a specific algorithm. If accepting the request, the RRMmodule further determines whether to set up the RRC connection on a Dedicated Channel (DCH)or on a Common Channel (CCH), based on a specific RRM algorithm. Typically, an RRCconnection is set up on the DCH.

Figure 6-7 shows the procedure for setting up an RRC connection on a DCH.

Figure 6-7 RRC connection setup procedure on a DCH

The procedure shown in Figure 6-7 is described as follows:

1. The UE sends an RRC CONNECTION REQUEST message to the SRNC through theuplink CCCH, requesting the establishment of an RRC connection.

2. Based on the cause in the RRC connection request and the system resource status, the SRNCdetermines to set up the RRC connection on a DCH and allocates the Radio NetworkTemporary Identity (RNTI), radio resources, and L1 and L2 resources. Then the SRNCsends a RADIO LINK SETUP REQUEST message to the NodeB, requesting the NodeBto allocate the specific radio link resources required for an RRC connection.

3. The NodeB responds with a RADIO LINK SETUP RESPONSE message to the SRNCafter successfully preparing the resources.

4. The SRNC uses the ALCAP protocol to set up the Iub user plane transport bearer andperforms the synchronization between the SRNC and the NodeB. This procedure isoptional. It is required for the ATM-based Iub interface only.

5. The SRNC sends an RRC CONNECTION SETUP message to the UE through the downlinkCCCH. The message contains the information about the DCH allocated by the SRNC.

6. The UE sends an RRC CONNECTION SETUP COMPLETE message to the SRNCthrough the uplink Dedicated Control Channel (DCCH) that is just set up. The messageindicates that the RRC connection setup procedure ends.

Figure 6-8 shows the procedure for setting up an RRC connection on a CCH.

6 Incoming Call ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

6-10 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 89: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Figure 6-8 RRC connection setup procedure on a CCH

The procedure shown in Figure 6-8 is described as follows:

1. The UE sends an RRC CONNECTION REQUEST message to the SRNC through theuplink CCCH, requesting the establishment of an RRC connection.

2. Based on the cause in the RRC connection request and the system resource status, the SRNCdetermines to set up the RRC connection on a CCH. The SRNC maps the logical channelof the UE onto a specific CCH in the cell. The SRNC then sends an RRC CONNECTIONSETUP message to the UE through the downlink CCCH. The message contains theinformation about the CCH.

3. The UE sends an RRC CONNECTION SETUP COMPLETE message to the SRNCthrough the uplink CCCH. The message indicates that the RRC connection setup procedureends.

Figure 6-9 shows the RRC connection rejected procedure.

Figure 6-9 RRC connection rejected procedure

The procedure shown in Figure 6-9 is described as follows:

1. The UE sends an RRC CONNECTION REQUEST message to the SRNC through theuplink CCCH, requesting the establishment of an RRC connection.

2. The SRNC determines to reject the RRC connection request, based on a specific algorithm.Then, the SRNC sends an RRC CONNECTION REJECT message to the UE. The messageindicates the reason for rejecting the RRC connection request.

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 6 Incoming Call Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-11

Page 90: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

6.5.3 Signaling Connection Setup Procedure (Incoming Call)The signaling connection setup procedure is performed to exchange the NAS informationbetween the UE and the CN. The NAS information is related to authentication, service request,connection setup, and so on.

Triggering ConditionsThe UE sends a direct transfer message to initiate the signaling connection setup procedure.

ProcedureFigure 6-10 shows the signaling connection setup procedure.

Figure 6-10 Signaling connection setup procedure

The procedure shown in Figure 6-10 is described as follows:

1. The UE sends an INITIAL DIRECT TRANSFER message to the SRNC through the RRCconnection. The message contains the initial NAS information to be sent to the CN by theUE.

2. The SRNC receives the INITIAL DIRECT TRANSFER message from the UE and sendsan INITIAL UE MESSAGE to the CN through the Iu interface. The INITIAL UEMESSAGE contains the NAS information to be sent to the CN by the UE. The content ofthe NAS information is PAGING RESPONSE.

3. The CN sends a response message to the SRNC.l If accepting the request, the CN sends a CONNECTION CONFIRM (CC) message to

the SRNC. The message indicates that the SCCP connection is set up. After receivingthe message, the SRNC confirms that the signaling connection is set up.

l If rejecting the request, the CN sends a CONNECTION REJECT (CJ) message to theSRNC. The message indicates that the SCCP connection fails to be set up. Afterreceiving the message, the SRNC confirms that the signaling connection fails to be setup and then initiates the RRC release procedure.

6 Incoming Call ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

6-12 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 91: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

6.5.4 Authentication and Security Mode Control ProcedureThe authentication and security mode control procedure is performed for the UE and the networkto implement bi-directional authentication and to negotiate and configure the integrity protectionalgorithm and ciphering algorithm. This procedure ensures integrity and correctness of signaling.

Triggering ConditionsThe UE and the CN exchange signaling. The network initiates the authentication and securitymode control procedure.

ProcedureFigure 6-11 shows the authentication and security mode control procedure.

Figure 6-11 Authentication and security mode control procedure

The procedure shown in Figure 6-11 is described as follows:

1. The CN sends a DIRECT TRANSFER message to the SRNC. The message indicatesAUTHENTICATION REQUEST.

2. The SRNC transparently sends the contents of the DIRECT TRANSFER message to theUE through a DOWNLINK DIRECT TRANSFER message.

3. The UE sends an UPLINK DIRECT TRANSFER message to the SRNC.4. The SRNC transparently sends the contents of the UPLINK DIRECT TRANSFER message

to the CN through a DIRECT TRANSFER message, indicating AUTHENTICATION

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 6 Incoming Call Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-13

Page 92: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

RESPONSE. If the UMTS Subscriber Identity Module (USIM) judges that theauthentication is successful, the UE returns a message with an XRES IE.

5. The CN sends a SECURITY MODE COMMAND message to the SRNC to initiate thesecurity mode control procedure. The message contains the information about the supportedciphering and integrity protection algorithms.

6. The SRNC sends a SECURITY MODE COMMAND message to the UE to inform the UEof the integrity protection and ciphering algorithms that the UTRAN selects.

7. The UE sends a response message to the SRNC.l If the integrity protection and ciphering algorithms are configured successfully, the UE

sends a SECURITY MODE COMMAND COMPLETE message to the SRNC. TheSRNC then sends a SECURITY MODE COMMAND COMPLETE message to the CN.The message contains the information about the integrity protection and cipheringalgorithms that the UE uses.

l If the UE does not support the integrity protection and ciphering algorithms, the UEsends a SECURITY MODE COMMAND FAILURE message to the SRNC. Themessage contains the error information and the reason for the failure. The SRNC thensends a SECURITY MODE COMMAND REJECT message to the CN.

6.5.5 Call Setup Procedure (Incoming Call)The call setup procedure is performed to set up a call.

Triggering ConditionsA UE receives a call from the CN.

ProcedureFigure 6-12 shows the call setup procedure.

6 Incoming Call ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

6-14 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 93: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Figure 6-12 Call setup procedure (incoming call)

The procedure shown in Figure 6-12 is described as follows:

1. The CN sends a DIRECT TRANSFER message to the SRNC. The message indicatesSETUP and contains the number of the calling party and the bearer capability of the call.

2. The SRNC transparently sends the contents of the DIRECT TRANSFER message to theUE through a DOWNLINK DIRECT TRANSFER message.

3. The UE sends an UPLINK DIRECT TRANSFER message to the SRNC.

4. The SRNC transparently sends the contents of the UPLINK DIRECT TRANSFER messageto the CN through a DIRECT TRANSFER message. The DIRECT TRANSFER messageindicates CALL CONFIRM and contains the information about the negotiated bearercapability of the call.

5. An RAB is set up. For details, refer to 6.5.6 RAB Setup Procedure.

6. The UE sends an UPLINK DIRECT TRANSFER message to the SRNC.

7. The SRNC transparently sends the contents of the UPLINK DIRECT TRANSFER messageto the CN through a DIRECT TRANSFER message, indicating ALERTING to request thecalled terminal to ring.

8. The UE sends an UPLINK DIRECT TRANSFER message to the SRNC.

9. The SRNC transparently sends the contents of the UPLINK DIRECT TRANSFER messageto the CN through a DIRECT TRANSFER message, indicating CONNECT. This meansthat the called party has answered the call.

10. The CN sends a DIRECT TRANSFER message to the SRNC. The message indicatesCONNECT ACKNOWLEDGE.

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 6 Incoming Call Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-15

Page 94: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

11. The SRNC transparently sends the contents of the DIRECT TRANSFER message to theUE through a DOWNLINK DIRECT TRANSFER message.

6.5.6 RAB Setup ProcedureThe RAB setup procedure is performed to set up a user plane bearer.

Triggering Conditions

A call is set up.

Procedure

I. Setting Up an RAB Successfully

Figure 6-13 shows the successful RAB setup procedure.

Figure 6-13 Successful RAB setup procedure

The procedure shown in Figure 6-13 is described as follows:

1. The CN sends an RAB ASSIGNMENT REQUEST message to the SRNC to initiate theRAB setup procedure.

2. (Optional; applicable to the ATM-based Iu-CS interface only) The SRNC maps the Qualityof Service (QoS) parameters for the RAB to the AAL2 link characteristic parameters andradio resource characteristic parameters. Based on the AAL2 link characteristic parameters,the ALCAP on the Iu interface initiates an Iu user plane transport bearer setup procedure.

3. The SRNC sends a RADIO LINK RECONFIGURATION PREPARE message to theNodeB, requesting the NodeB to prepare for adding one or more DCHs to the existing radiolinks for carrying the RAB.

6 Incoming Call ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

6-16 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 95: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

4. The NodeB allocates the associated resources and then sends a RADIO LINKRECONFIGURATION READY message to the SRNC.

5. (Optional; required for the ATM-based Iub interface only) The Iub ALCAP at the SRNCinitiates an Iub user plane transport bearer setup procedure. The NodeB and the SRNCperform synchronization by exchanging uplink and downlink synchronization frames inthe DCH frame protocol.

6. The SRNC sends a RADIO BEARER SETUP message to the UE.

7. The SRNC sends a RADIO LINK RECONFIGURATION COMMIT message to theNodeB.

8. After performing the radio bearer setup, the UE sends a RADIO BEARER SETUPCOMPLETE message to the SRNC.

9. The SRNC sends an RAB ASSIGNMENT RESPONSE message to the CN. The RAB isset up.

II. Failing to Set Up an RAB

Figure 6-14 shows the unsuccessful RAB setup procedure.

Figure 6-14 Unsuccessful RAB setup procedure

The procedure shown in Figure 6-14 is described as follows:

1. The CN sends an RAB ASSIGNMENT REQUEST message to the SRNC to initiate theRAB setup procedure.

2. The SRNC sends an RAB ASSIGNMENT RESPONSE message to the CN. The messageindicates the ID of the RAB that fails to be set up and the reason for the failure.

6.5.7 Call Release Procedure (Incoming Call)The call release procedure is performed to release services and resources after a call ends.

Triggering Conditions

A call ends and the calling party hangs up.

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 6 Incoming Call Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-17

Page 96: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

ProcedureFigure 6-15 shows the call release procedure.

Figure 6-15 Call release procedure (incoming call)

The procedure shown in Figure 6-15 is described as follows:

1. The CN sends a DIRECT TRANSFER message to the SRNC. The message indicatesDISCONNECT to inform the UE that the calling party has hanged up.

2. The SRNC transparently sends the contents of the DIRECT TRANSFER message to theUE through a DOWNLINK DIRECT TRANSFER message.

3. The UE sends an UPLINK DIRECT TRANSFER message to the SRNC.4. The SRNC transparently sends the contents of the UPLINK DIRECT TRANSFER message

to the CN through a DIRECT TRANSFER message. The DIRECT TRANSFER messageindicates RELEASE which requests release of the call.

5. The CN sends a DIRECT TRANSFER message to the SRNC. The message indicatesRELEASE COMPLETE.

6. The SRNC transparently sends the contents of the DIRECT TRANSFER message to theUE through a DOWNLINK DIRECT TRANSFER message.

7. The CN sends an IU RELEASE COMMAND message to the SRNC to request call releaseon the Iu interface. The message indicates the reason for the Iu release.

8. (Optional; applicable to the ATM-based Iu-CS interface only) The ALCAP protocol on theIu interface initiates an Iu data transport bearer release procedure.

9. The SRNC sends an IU RELEASE COMPLETE message to the CN.

6 Incoming Call ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

6-18 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 97: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

6.5.8 RRC Connection Release ProcedureThe RRC connection release procedure is performed to release the signaling connection and allradio bearers between the UE and the UTRAN.

Triggering Conditions

After an RAB is released, the SRNC judges whether the RRC connection carries any other RABof the UE. If judging that the RRC connection does not carry any other RAB of the UE, theSRNC initiates an RRC connection release procedure.

Procedure

Based on the resource occupied by the RRC connection, there are two types of RRC connectionrelease procedure: release of an RRC connection from a DCH and release of an RRC connectionfrom a CCH.

NOTE

If an RRC connection needs to be released after a successful outgoing call, the RRC connection on theDCH is released. If a radio bearer fails to be set up, the RRC connection on the CCH is released.

I. Releasing an RRC Connection from a DCH

Figure 6-16 shows the procedure for releasing an RRC connection from a DCH.

Figure 6-16 RRC connection release procedure (from a DCH)

The procedure shown in Figure 6-16 is described as follows:

1. The SRNC sends an RRC CONNECTION RELEASE message to the UE through theDCCH.

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 6 Incoming Call Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-19

Page 98: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

NOTE

The SRNC may send the RRC CONNECTION RELEASE message several times to increase theprobability of proper reception of the message by the UE. The RRC SNs of these messages are thesame. The number of retransmissions and the transmission intervals are determined by the SRNC. Ifthe SRNC does not receive an RRC CONNECTION RELEASE COMPLETE message from the UEafter sending the RRC CONNECTION RELEASE message for four times, the SRNC judges that theUE has released the RRC connection.

2. The UE sends an RRC CONNECTION RELEASE COMPLETE message to the SRNC.3. The SRNC sends a RADIO LINK DELETION REQUEST message to the NodeB,

requesting the NodeB to delete the radio link resources in the NodeB.4. After releasing the resources, the NodeB sends a RADIO LINK DELETION RESPONSE

message to the SRNC.5. (Optional; required for the ATM-based Iub interface only) The SRNC uses the ALCAP

protocol to initiate an Iub user plane transport bearer release procedure. Then, the RRCconnection release procedure ends.

II. Releasing an RRC Connection from a CCH

Figure 6-17 shows the procedure for releasing an RRC connection from a CCH.

Figure 6-17 RRC connection release procedure (from a CCH)

The procedure shown in Figure 6-17 is described as follows:

1. The SRNC sends an RRC CONNECTION RELEASE message to the UE through theCCCH.

2. The UE sends an RRC CONNECTION RELEASE COMPLETE message to the SRNC.

6 Incoming Call ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

6-20 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 99: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

7 Intra-Frequency Handover Procedure

About This Chapter

The intra-frequency handover procedure is performed to hand over a UE from the WCDMA cellthat it camps on to an intra-frequency WCDMA cell. This topic describes intra-frequencyhandover in terms of types, protocols, triggering conditions, signaling procedure of a successfulintra-frequency handover, and signaling tracing on the RNC LMT. This topic also describes theelementary procedures in terms of functions, triggering conditions, and signaling in normal andabnormal conditions.

7.1 Types of Intra-Frequency HandoverBased on the connections between the UE and the network during the handover, intra-frequencyhandovers are categorized into two types: intra-frequency soft handover and intra-frequencyhard handover.

7.2 Intra-Frequency Soft Handover Within a NodeBThe procedure of intra-frequency soft handover within a NodeB is performed to hand over a UEfrom a cell to an intra-frequency cell that is controlled by the same NodeB.

7.3 Intra-Frequency Soft Handover Between NodeBs in an RNCThe procedure of intra-frequency soft handover between NodeBs in an RNC is performed tohand over a UE from a cell to an intra-frequency cell that is controlled by another NodeB in thesame RNC.

7.4 Intra-Frequency Soft Handover Between RNCsThe procedure of intra-frequency soft handover between RNCs is performed to hand over a UEfrom a cell to an intra-frequency cell that is controlled by another RNC.

7.5 Intra-Frequency Hard Handover Between NodeBs in an RNCThe procedure of intra-frequency hard handover between NodeBs in an RNC is performed tohand over a UE from a cell to an intra-frequency cell that is controlled by another NodeB in thesame RNC.

7.6 Intra-Frequency Hard Handover Between RNCsThe procedure of intra-frequency hard handover between RNCs is performed to hand over a UEfrom a cell to an intra-frequency cell that is controlled by another RNC.

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 7 Intra-Frequency Handover Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-1

Page 100: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

7.1 Types of Intra-Frequency HandoverBased on the connections between the UE and the network during the handover, intra-frequencyhandovers are categorized into two types: intra-frequency soft handover and intra-frequencyhard handover.

Table 7-1 lists the types of intra-frequency handover.

Table 7-1 Types of intra-frequency handover

Type Subtype Description

Intra-frequency softhandover

Intra-frequency soft handoverwithin a NodeB, that is, softerhandover

During an intra-frequency soft handover,the UE sets up a connection to the targetcell before disconnecting from the sourcecell.During an intra-frequency hard handover,the UE disconnects from the source cellbefore setting up a connection towards thetarget cell.Intra-frequency soft handover is common,and intra-frequency hard handover isapplied only in special scenarios, forexample, a handover between two RNCswhere no Iur interface exists.

Intra-frequency soft handoverbetween NodeBs in an RNC

Intra-frequency soft handoverbetween RNCs

Intra-frequencyhard handover

Intra-frequency hard handoverbetween NodeBs in an RNC

Intra-frequency hard handoverbetween RNCs

7.2 Intra-Frequency Soft Handover Within a NodeBThe procedure of intra-frequency soft handover within a NodeB is performed to hand over a UEfrom a cell to an intra-frequency cell that is controlled by the same NodeB.

7.2.1 Protocols Related to Intra-Frequency Soft Handover Within a NodeBThe procedure of intra-frequency soft handover within a NodeB complies with some 3GPP TS25protocols.

7.2.2 Triggering Conditions of Intra-Frequency Soft Handover Within a NodeBIntra-frequency soft handover within a NodeB is the intra-frequency soft handover where thesource and target cells are controlled by the same NodeB.

7.2.3 Signaling Procedure of a Successful Intra-Frequency Soft Handover Within a NodeBThis describes the signaling procedure of a successful intra-frequency soft handover within aNodeB. For the messages related to handover failures, refer to the elementary procedures.

7.2.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Procedure of Intra-Frequency Soft Handover Within aNodeBThe signaling tracing function of the RNC LMT can be used to trace the signaling procedure ofan intra-frequency soft handover within a NodeB.

7.2.5 Elementary Procedures of Intra-Frequency Soft Handover Within a NodeBThis describes the elementary procedures of intra-frequency soft handover within a NodeB interms of triggering conditions and signaling procedures in normal and abnormal conditions.

7 Intra-Frequency Handover ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

7-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 101: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

7.2.1 Protocols Related to Intra-Frequency Soft Handover Within aNodeB

The procedure of intra-frequency soft handover within a NodeB complies with some 3GPP TS25protocols.

The compliance protocols are as follows:l 3GPP TS25.331 "Radio Resource Control (RRC)"

l 3GPP TS25.433 "UTRAN Iub interface Node B Application Part (NBAP) signalling"

7.2.2 Triggering Conditions of Intra-Frequency Soft HandoverWithin a NodeB

Intra-frequency soft handover within a NodeB is the intra-frequency soft handover where thesource and target cells are controlled by the same NodeB.

The handover is triggered when the signal quality of the serving cell is degraded or the load ofthe serving cell is heavy.

7.2.3 Signaling Procedure of a Successful Intra-Frequency SoftHandover Within a NodeB

This describes the signaling procedure of a successful intra-frequency soft handover within aNodeB. For the messages related to handover failures, refer to the elementary procedures.

Figure 7-1 shows the signaling procedure of a successful intra-frequency soft handover withina NodeB.

Figure 7-1 Signaling procedure of a successful intra-frequency soft handover within a NodeB

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 7 Intra-Frequency Handover Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-3

Page 102: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

7.2.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Procedure of Intra-FrequencySoft Handover Within a NodeB

The signaling tracing function of the RNC LMT can be used to trace the signaling procedure ofan intra-frequency soft handover within a NodeB.

Prerequisitel The RNC LMT works properly.

l You are logged in to the RNC as a user authorized to perform tracing management.

ContextTable 7-2 lists the messages to be traced.

Table 7-2 Messages to be traced

Interfaceand Protocolto Be Traced

Message Name on the LMT Message Name in Protocols

Uu

RRC_ACTIVE_SET_UPDATE ACTIVE SET UPDATE

RRC_ACTIVE_SET_UPDATE_CMP ACTIVE SET UPDATE COMPLETE

RRC_ACTIVE_SET_UPDATE_FAIL ACTIVE SET UPDATE FAILURE

Iub

NBAP_RL_ADD_REQ RADIO LINK ADDITION REQUEST

NBAP_RL_ADD_RSP RADIO LINK ADDITION RESPONSE

NBAP_RL_ADD_FAIL RADIO LINK ADDITION FAILURE

NBAP_RL_DEL_REQ RADIO LINK DELETION REQUEST

NBAP_RL_DEL_RSP RADIO LINK DELETION RESPONSE

Procedure

Step 1 Create a Uu tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task.Figure 7-2 shows an example of Uu signaling tracing result.

Figure 7-2 Example of Uu signaling tracing result

7 Intra-Frequency Handover ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

7-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 103: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Step 2 Create an Iub tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task.Figure 7-3 shows an example of Iub signaling tracing result.

Figure 7-3 Example of Iub signaling tracing result

----End

7.2.5 Elementary Procedures of Intra-Frequency Soft HandoverWithin a NodeB

This describes the elementary procedures of intra-frequency soft handover within a NodeB interms of triggering conditions and signaling procedures in normal and abnormal conditions.

7.2.5.1 Radio Link Addition ProcedureThe radio link addition procedure is performed to add one or more radio links towards a UE.

7.2.5.2 Active Set Update ProcedureThe active set update procedure is performed to update the active set of radio links between theUE and the UTRAN.

7.2.5.3 Radio Link Deletion ProcedureThe radio link deletion procedure is performed to release resources in a NodeB for one or moreestablished radio links towards a UE.

Radio Link Addition ProcedureThe radio link addition procedure is performed to add one or more radio links towards a UE.

Triggering ConditionsThe CRNC sends a RADIO LINK ADDITION REQUEST message.

ProcedureFigure 7-4 shows the radio link addition procedure.

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 7 Intra-Frequency Handover Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-5

Page 104: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Figure 7-4 Radio link addition procedure

The procedure shown in Figure 7-4 is described as follows:

1. The CRNC sends a RADIO LINK ADDITION REQUEST message to the NodeB. Afterreceiving the message, the NodeB reserves the necessary resources and configures the newradio link or links according to the parameters given in the message.

2. The NodeB sends a response message to the CRNC.l If all the requested radio links are added, the NodeB saves the value of the Configuration

Generation ID IE contained in the RADIO LINK ADDITION REQUEST message andsends a RADIO LINK ADDITION RESPONSE message.

l If any radio link fails to be added, the NodeB sends a RADIO LINK ADDITIONFAILURE message. The message contains the failure cause in the Cause IE.

Active Set Update ProcedureThe active set update procedure is performed to update the active set of radio links between theUE and the UTRAN.

Triggering ConditionsThe active set update procedure can be triggered in either of the following conditions:l Radio link addition

l Radio link deletion

ProcedureFigure 7-5 shows the active set update procedure.

7 Intra-Frequency Handover ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

7-6 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 105: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Figure 7-5 Active set update procedure

The procedure shown in Figure 7-5 is described as follows:

1. The SRNC sends an ACTIVE SET UPDATE message to the UE. If a radio link needs tobe added, the message indicates radio link addition. If a radio link needs to be deleted, themessage indicates radio link deletion.

2. The UE adds or deletes the radio links according to the Radio Link Addition Informationor Radio Link Removal Information IE contained in the ACTIVE SET UPDATE message.

3. The UE sends a response message to the SRNC.l If adding or deleting the radio links successfully, the UE sends an ACTIVE SET

UPDATE COMPLETE message on the DCCH by using Acknowledged Mode (AM)Radio Link Control (RLC).

l If the ACTIVE SET UPDATE message contains the configuration not supported by theUE or if the active set does not contain the radio links specified by the Radio LinkRemoval Information IE, the UE sends an ACTIVE SET UPDATE FAILURE message.

Radio Link Deletion ProcedureThe radio link deletion procedure is performed to release resources in a NodeB for one or moreestablished radio links towards a UE.

Triggering ConditionsThe CRNC sends a RADIO LINK DELETION REQUEST message.

ProcedureFigure 7-6 shows the radio link deletion procedure.

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 7 Intra-Frequency Handover Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-7

Page 106: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Figure 7-6 Radio link deletion procedure

The procedure shown in Figure 7-6 is described as follows:

1. The CRNC sends a RADIO LINK DELETION REQUEST message to the NodeB. Afterreceiving the message, the NodeB deletes the radio links specified by the message.

2. The NodeB sends a response message to the CRNC.l If all the radio links are deleted, the NodeB sends a RADIO LINK DELETION

RESPONSE message.l If any radio link fails to be deleted, the NodeB sends a RADIO LINK DELETION

RESPONSE message. The Criticality Diagnostics field in the message indicates thefailure cause.

7.3 Intra-Frequency Soft Handover Between NodeBs in anRNC

The procedure of intra-frequency soft handover between NodeBs in an RNC is performed tohand over a UE from a cell to an intra-frequency cell that is controlled by another NodeB in thesame RNC.

7.3.1 Protocols Related to Intra-Frequency Soft Handover Between NodeBs in an RNCThe procedure of intra-frequency soft handover between NodeBs in an RNC complies with some3GPP TS25 protocols and an ITU-T protocol.

7.3.2 Triggering Conditions of Intra-Frequency Soft Handover Between NodeBs in an RNCIntra-frequency soft handover between NodeBs in an RNC is the intra-frequency soft handoverwhere the source and target cells are controlled by different NodeBs in an RNC.

7.3.3 Signaling Procedure of a Successful Intra-Frequency Soft Handover Between NodeBs inan RNCThis describes the signaling procedure of a successful intra-frequency soft handover betweenNodeBs in an RNC. For the messages related to handover failures, refer to the elementaryprocedures.

7.3.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Procedure of Intra-Frequency Soft Handover BetweenNodeBs in an RNC

7 Intra-Frequency Handover ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

7-8 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 107: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

The signaling tracing function of the RNC LMT can be used to trace the signaling procedure ofan intra-frequency soft handover between NodeBs in an RNC.

7.3.5 Elementary Procedures of Intra-Frequency Soft Handover Between NodeBs in an RNCThis describes the elementary procedures of intra-frequency soft handover between NodeBs inan RNC in terms of triggering conditions and signaling procedures in normal and abnormalconditions.

7.3.1 Protocols Related to Intra-Frequency Soft Handover BetweenNodeBs in an RNC

The procedure of intra-frequency soft handover between NodeBs in an RNC complies with some3GPP TS25 protocols and an ITU-T protocol.

The compliance protocols are as follows:l 3GPP TS25.331 "Radio Resource Control (RRC)"

l 3GPP TS25.433 "UTRAN Iub interface Node B Application Part (NBAP) signalling"

l ITU-T Q.2630 "AAL type 2 Signalling Protocol"

7.3.2 Triggering Conditions of Intra-Frequency Soft HandoverBetween NodeBs in an RNC

Intra-frequency soft handover between NodeBs in an RNC is the intra-frequency soft handoverwhere the source and target cells are controlled by different NodeBs in an RNC.

The handover is triggered when the SRNC finds that another cell has higher signal quality thanthe serving cell or that the load of the serving cell is heavy.

7.3.3 Signaling Procedure of a Successful Intra-Frequency SoftHandover Between NodeBs in an RNC

This describes the signaling procedure of a successful intra-frequency soft handover betweenNodeBs in an RNC. For the messages related to handover failures, refer to the elementaryprocedures.

Figure 7-7 shows the signaling procedure of a successful intra-frequency soft handover betweenNodeBs in an RNC.

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 7 Intra-Frequency Handover Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-9

Page 108: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Figure 7-7 Signaling procedure of a successful intra-frequency soft handover between NodeBsin an RNC

Note the following information about the procedure shown in Figure 7-7:l During the handover, NodeB 1 is the source NodeB and NodeB 2 is the target NodeB.

l If IP transport is applied to the Iub interface, no ALCAP procedure is performed on the Iubinterface after radio links are set up or deleted.

7.3.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Procedure of Intra-FrequencySoft Handover Between NodeBs in an RNC

The signaling tracing function of the RNC LMT can be used to trace the signaling procedure ofan intra-frequency soft handover between NodeBs in an RNC.

Prerequisitel The RNC LMT works properly.

l You are logged in to the RNC as a user authorized to perform tracing management.

ContextTable 7-3 lists the messages to be traced.

7 Intra-Frequency Handover ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

7-10 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 109: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Table 7-3 Messages to be traced

Interfaceand Protocolto Be Traced

Message Name on the LMT Message Name in Protocols

Uu

RRC_ACTIVE_SET_UPDATE ACTIVE SET UPDATE

RRC_ACTIVE_SET_UPDATE_CMP ACTIVE SET UPDATE COMPLETE

RRC_ACTIVE_SET_UPDATE_FAIL ACTIVE SET UPDATE FAILURE

Iub

NBAP_RL_SETUP_REQ RADIO LINK SETUP REQUEST

NBAP_RL_SETUP_RSP RADIO LINK SETUP RESPONSE

NBAP_RL_SETUP_FAIL RADIO LINK SETUP FAILURE

NBAP_RL_RESTORE_IND RADIO LINK RESTORE INDICATION

NBAP_RL_DEL_REQ RADIO LINK DELETION REQUEST

NBAP_RL_DEL_RSP RADIO LINK DELETION RESPONSE

Q.AAL2 No message name needs to bespecified. –

Procedure

Step 1 Create a Uu tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task.Figure 7-8 shows an example of Uu signaling tracing result.

Figure 7-8 Example of Uu signaling tracing result

Step 2 Create an Iub tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task.Figure 7-9 shows an example of Iub signaling tracing result.

Figure 7-9 Example of Iub signaling tracing result

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 7 Intra-Frequency Handover Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-11

Page 110: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Step 3 Create a Q.AAL2 tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task.Figure 7-10 shows an example of Q.AAL2 signaling tracing result.

Figure 7-10 Example of Q.AAL2 signaling tracing result

----End

7.3.5 Elementary Procedures of Intra-Frequency Soft HandoverBetween NodeBs in an RNC

This describes the elementary procedures of intra-frequency soft handover between NodeBs inan RNC in terms of triggering conditions and signaling procedures in normal and abnormalconditions.

7.3.5.1 Radio Link Setup Procedure (Intra-RNC Handover or GSM to WCDMA CS Handover)The radio link setup procedure (intra-RNC handover or GSM to WCDMA CS handover) isperformed to set up a radio link in an SRNC-controlled NodeB for a UE.

7.3.5.2 Iub User Plane Setup ProcedureThe Iub user plane setup procedure is performed to set up bearers for data transmission on theIub interface.

7.3.5.3 Radio Link Restoration Procedure (Intra-RNC Handover or GSM to WCDMA CSHandover)The radio link restoration procedure (intra-RNC handover or GSM to WCDMA CS handover)is performed for a NodeB to notify the CRNC that the uplink synchronization of one or moreradio links is achieved or re-achieved.

7.3.5.4 Active Set Update ProcedureThe active set update procedure is performed to update the active set of radio links between theUE and the UTRAN.

7.3.5.5 Radio Link Deletion ProcedureThe radio link deletion procedure is performed to release resources in a NodeB for one or moreestablished radio links towards a UE.

7.3.5.6 Iub User Plane Release ProcedureThe Iub user plane release procedure is performed to release data transport bearers from the Iubinterface.

Radio Link Setup Procedure (Intra-RNC Handover or GSM to WCDMA CSHandover)

The radio link setup procedure (intra-RNC handover or GSM to WCDMA CS handover) isperformed to set up a radio link in an SRNC-controlled NodeB for a UE.

7 Intra-Frequency Handover ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

7-12 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 111: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Triggering ConditionsThe CRNC sends a RADIO LINK SETUP REQUEST message.

ProcedureFigure 7-11 shows the radio link setup procedure (intra-RNC handover or GSM to WCDMACS handover).

Figure 7-11 Radio link setup procedure (intra-RNC handover or GSM to WCDMA CShandover)

The procedure shown in Figure 7-11 is described as follows:

1. The CRNC sends a RADIO LINK SETUP REQUEST message to the NodeB. Afterreceiving the message, the NodeB reserves the necessary resources and configures the newradio link according to the parameters given in the message.

2. The NodeB sends a response message to the CRNC.l If the radio link is set up, the NodeB saves the value of the Configuration Generation

ID IE contained in the RADIO LINK SETUP REQUEST message and sends a RADIOLINK SETUP RESPONSE message.

l If the radio link fails to be set up, the NodeB sends a RADIO LINK SETUP FAILUREmessage. The message contains the failure cause.

Iub User Plane Setup ProcedureThe Iub user plane setup procedure is performed to set up bearers for data transmission on theIub interface.

Triggering ConditionsThe Iub user plane setup procedure can be triggered in one of the following conditions:l The common transport channels are set up.

l The dedicated transport channels are set up.

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 7 Intra-Frequency Handover Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-13

Page 112: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Procedure

Figure 7-12 shows the Iub user plane setup procedure.

Figure 7-12 Iub user plane setup procedure

The procedure shown in Figure 7-12 is described as follows:

1. The CRNC uses the ALCAP protocol to send a QAAL2 ESTABLISH REQUEST messageto the NodeB.

2. The NodeB uses the ALCAP protocol to send a response message to the CRNC.

l If the Iub data transport bearers are set up, the NodeB sends a QAAL2 ESTABLISHCONFIRM message.

l If an Iub data transport bearer fails to be set up, the NodeB sends a QAAL2 ESTABLISHRELEASE CONFIRM message.

Radio Link Restoration Procedure (Intra-RNC Handover or GSM to WCDMA CSHandover)

The radio link restoration procedure (intra-RNC handover or GSM to WCDMA CS handover)is performed for a NodeB to notify the CRNC that the uplink synchronization of one or moreradio links is achieved or re-achieved.

Triggering Conditions

The NodeB detects UL signals from the UE. That is, the NodeB finishes UL synchronizationwith the UE.

Procedure

Figure 7-13 shows the radio link restoration procedure (intra-RNC handover or GSM toWCDMA CS handover).

7 Intra-Frequency Handover ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

7-14 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 113: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Figure 7-13 Radio link restoration procedure (intra-RNC handover or GSM to WCDMA CShandover)

After performing UL synchronization with the UE, the NodeB sends a RADIO LINK RESTOREINDICATION message to the CRNC.

Active Set Update ProcedureThe active set update procedure is performed to update the active set of radio links between theUE and the UTRAN.

Triggering ConditionsThe active set update procedure can be triggered in either of the following conditions:l Radio link addition

l Radio link deletion

ProcedureFigure 7-14 shows the active set update procedure.

Figure 7-14 Active set update procedure

The procedure shown in Figure 7-14 is described as follows:

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 7 Intra-Frequency Handover Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-15

Page 114: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

1. The SRNC sends an ACTIVE SET UPDATE message to the UE. If a radio link needs tobe added, the message indicates radio link addition. If a radio link needs to be deleted, themessage indicates radio link deletion.

2. The UE adds or deletes the radio links according to the Radio Link Addition Informationor Radio Link Removal Information IE contained in the ACTIVE SET UPDATE message.

3. The UE sends a response message to the SRNC.l If adding or deleting the radio links successfully, the UE sends an ACTIVE SET

UPDATE COMPLETE message on the DCCH by using Acknowledged Mode (AM)Radio Link Control (RLC).

l If the ACTIVE SET UPDATE message contains the configuration not supported by theUE or if the active set does not contain the radio links specified by the Radio LinkRemoval Information IE, the UE sends an ACTIVE SET UPDATE FAILURE message.

Radio Link Deletion ProcedureThe radio link deletion procedure is performed to release resources in a NodeB for one or moreestablished radio links towards a UE.

Triggering ConditionsThe CRNC sends a RADIO LINK DELETION REQUEST message.

ProcedureFigure 7-15 shows the radio link deletion procedure.

Figure 7-15 Radio link deletion procedure

The procedure shown in Figure 7-15 is described as follows:

1. The CRNC sends a RADIO LINK DELETION REQUEST message to the NodeB. Afterreceiving the message, the NodeB deletes the radio links specified by the message.

2. The NodeB sends a response message to the CRNC.l If all the radio links are deleted, the NodeB sends a RADIO LINK DELETION

RESPONSE message.

7 Intra-Frequency Handover ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

7-16 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 115: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

l If any radio link fails to be deleted, the NodeB sends a RADIO LINK DELETIONRESPONSE message. The Criticality Diagnostics field in the message indicates thefailure cause.

Iub User Plane Release ProcedureThe Iub user plane release procedure is performed to release data transport bearers from the Iubinterface.

Triggering ConditionsThe transport channels on the Iub user plane need to be removed.

ProcedureFigure 7-16 shows the Iub user plane release procedure.

Figure 7-16 Iub user plane release procedure

The procedure shown in Figure 7-16 is described as follows:

1. The CRNC uses the ALCAP protocol to send a QAAL2 RELEASE REQUEST messageto the NodeB.

2. The NodeB uses the ALCAP protocol to send a response message to the CRNC.l If the Iub data transport bearers are released, the NodeB sends a QAAL2 RELEASE

CONFIRM message to confirm the release.l If an Iub data transport bearer fails to be released, the NodeB sends a QAAL2 RELEASE

CONFIRM message that indicates the failure cause.

7.4 Intra-Frequency Soft Handover Between RNCsThe procedure of intra-frequency soft handover between RNCs is performed to hand over a UEfrom a cell to an intra-frequency cell that is controlled by another RNC.

7.4.1 Protocols Related to Intra-Frequency Soft Handover Between RNCs

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 7 Intra-Frequency Handover Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-17

Page 116: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

The procedure of intra-frequency soft handover between RNCs complies with some 3GPP TS25protocols and an ITU-T protocol.

7.4.2 Triggering Conditions of Intra-Frequency Soft Handover Between RNCsIntra-frequency soft handover between RNCs is the intra-frequency soft handover where thesource and target cells are controlled by different RNCs.

7.4.3 Signaling Procedure of a Successful Intra-Frequency Soft Handover Between RNCsThis describes the signaling procedure of a successful intra-frequency soft handover betweenRNCs. For the messages related to handover failures, refer to the elementary procedures.

7.4.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Procedure of Intra-Frequency Soft Handover BetweenRNCsThe signaling tracing function of the RNC LMT can be used to trace the signaling procedure ofan intra-frequency soft handover between RNCs.

7.4.5 Elementary Procedures of Intra-Frequency Soft Handover Between RNCsThis describes the elementary procedures of intra-frequency soft handover between RNCs interms of triggering conditions and signaling procedures in normal and abnormal conditions.

7.4.1 Protocols Related to Intra-Frequency Soft Handover BetweenRNCs

The procedure of intra-frequency soft handover between RNCs complies with some 3GPP TS25protocols and an ITU-T protocol.

The compliance protocols are as follows:l 3GPP TS25.331 "Radio Resource Control (RRC)"

l 3GPP TS25.423 "UTRAN Iur interface RNSAP signalling"

l 3GPP TS25.433 "UTRAN Iub interface Node B Application Part (NBAP) signalling"

l ITU-T Q.2630 "AAL type 2 Signalling Protocol"

7.4.2 Triggering Conditions of Intra-Frequency Soft HandoverBetween RNCs

Intra-frequency soft handover between RNCs is the intra-frequency soft handover where thesource and target cells are controlled by different RNCs.

The handover is triggered when the SRNC finds that another cell has higher signal quality thanthe serving cell or that the load of the serving cell is heavy.

7.4.3 Signaling Procedure of a Successful Intra-Frequency SoftHandover Between RNCs

This describes the signaling procedure of a successful intra-frequency soft handover betweenRNCs. For the messages related to handover failures, refer to the elementary procedures.

Figure 7-17 shows the signaling procedure of a successful intra-frequency soft handoverbetween RNCs.

7 Intra-Frequency Handover ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

7-18 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 117: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Figure 7-17 Signaling procedure of a successful intra-frequency soft handover between RNCs

Note the following information about the procedure shown in Figure 7-17:

l During the handover, NodeB 1 is the source NodeB and NodeB 2 is the target NodeB.

l If IP transport is applied to the Iub interface, no ALCAP procedure is performed on the Iubinterface after radio links are set up or deleted.

l If IP transport is applied to the Iur interface, no ALCAP procedure is performed on the Iurinterface after radio links are set up or deleted.

7.4.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Procedure of Intra-FrequencySoft Handover Between RNCs

The signaling tracing function of the RNC LMT can be used to trace the signaling procedure ofan intra-frequency soft handover between RNCs.

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 7 Intra-Frequency Handover Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-19

Page 118: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Prerequisitel The RNC LMT works properly.l You are logged in to the RNC as a user authorized to perform tracing management.

ContextTable 7-4 lists the messages to be traced.

Table 7-4 Messages to be traced

Interfaceand Protocolto Be Traced

Message Name on the LMT Message Name in Protocols

Uu

RRC_ACTIVE_SET_UPDATE ACTIVE SET UPDATE

RRC_ACTIVE_SET_UPDATE_CMP ACTIVE SET UPDATE COMPLETE

RRC_ACTIVE_SET_UPDATE_FAIL ACTIVE SET UPDATE FAILURE

Iub

NBAP_RL_SETUP_REQ RADIO LINK SETUP REQUEST

NBAP_RL_SETUP_RSP RADIO LINK SETUP RESPONSE

NBAP_RL_SETUP_FAIL RADIO LINK SETUP FAILURE

NBAP_RL_RESTORE_IND RADIO LINK RESTORE INDICATION

NBAP_RL_DEL_REQ RADIO LINK DELETION REQUEST

NBAP_RL_DEL_RSP RADIO LINK DELETION RESPONSE

Iur

RNSAP_RL_SETUP_REQ RADIO LINK SETUP REQUEST

RNSAP_RL_SETUP_RSP RADIO LINK SETUP RESPONSE

RNSAP_RL_SETUP_FAIL RADIO LINK SETUP FAILURE

RNSAP_RL_RESTORE_IND RADIO LINK RESTORE INDICATION

Q.AAL2 No message name needs to bespecified. –

ProcedureStep 1 Create a Uu tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task.

Figure 7-18 shows an example of Uu signaling tracing result.

Figure 7-18 Example of Uu signaling tracing result

7 Intra-Frequency Handover ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

7-20 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 119: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Step 2 Create an Iub tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task.Figure 7-19 shows an example of Iub signaling tracing on the source RNC.

Figure 7-19 Example of Iub signaling tracing result (source RNC)

Figure 7-20 shows an example of Iub signaling tracing on the target RNC.

Figure 7-20 Example of Iub signaling tracing result (target RNC)

Step 3 Create an Iur tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task.Figure 7-21 shows an example of Iur signaling tracing result.

Figure 7-21 Example of Iur signaling tracing result

Step 4 Create a Q.AAL2 tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task.Figure 7-22 shows an example of Q.AAL2 signaling tracing result.

Figure 7-22 Example of Q.AAL2 signaling tracing result

----End

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 7 Intra-Frequency Handover Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-21

Page 120: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

7.4.5 Elementary Procedures of Intra-Frequency Soft HandoverBetween RNCs

This describes the elementary procedures of intra-frequency soft handover between RNCs interms of triggering conditions and signaling procedures in normal and abnormal conditions.

7.4.5.1 Radio Link Setup Procedure (Inter-RNC Handover)The radio link setup procedure for inter-RNC handover is performed to set up a radio link in aDRNC-controlled NodeB for a UE.

7.4.5.2 Iub User Plane Setup ProcedureThe Iub user plane setup procedure is performed to set up bearers for data transmission on theIub interface.

7.4.5.3 Radio Link Restoration Procedure (Inter-RNC Handover)The radio link restoration procedure for inter-RNC handover is performed for a NodeB to notifythe SRNC that the uplink synchronization of one or more radio links is achieved or re-achieved.

7.4.5.4 Iur User Plane Setup ProcedureThe Iur user plane setup procedure is performed to set up bearers for data transmission on theIur interface.

7.4.5.5 Active Set Update ProcedureThe active set update procedure is performed to update the active set of radio links between theUE and the UTRAN.

7.4.5.6 Radio Link Deletion ProcedureThe radio link deletion procedure is performed to release resources in a NodeB for one or moreestablished radio links towards a UE.

7.4.5.7 Iub User Plane Release ProcedureThe Iub user plane release procedure is performed to release data transport bearers from the Iubinterface.

7.4.5.8 Iur User Plane Release ProcedureThe Iur user plane release procedure is performed to release data transport bearers from the Iurinterface.

Radio Link Setup Procedure (Inter-RNC Handover)The radio link setup procedure for inter-RNC handover is performed to set up a radio link in aDRNC-controlled NodeB for a UE.

Triggering ConditionsThe SRNC sends a RADIO LINK SETUP REQUEST message.

ProcedureFigure 7-23 shows the radio link setup procedure for inter-RNC handover.

7 Intra-Frequency Handover ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

7-22 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 121: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Figure 7-23 Radio link setup procedure (inter-RNC handover)

The procedure shown in Figure 7-23 is described as follows:

1. The SRNC sends a RADIO LINK SETUP REQUEST message to the DRNC.2. The DRNC sends a RADIO LINK SETUP REQUEST message to the target NodeB.3. The NodeB reserves the necessary resources and configures the new radio link according

to the parameters given in the message.4. The NodeB reports the radio link setup result to the DRNC.

l If the radio link is set up, the NodeB saves the value of the Configuration GenerationID IE contained in the RADIO LINK SETUP REQUEST message and sends a RADIOLINK SETUP RESPONSE message.

l If the radio link fails to be set up, the NodeB sends a RADIO LINK SETUP FAILUREmessage.

5. The DRNC reports the radio link setup result to the SRNC.l If the radio link is set up, the DRNC sends a RADIO LINK SETUP RESPONSE

message.l If the radio link fails to be set up, the DRNC sends a RADIO LINK SETUP FAILURE

message, indicating the failure cause.

Iub User Plane Setup ProcedureThe Iub user plane setup procedure is performed to set up bearers for data transmission on theIub interface.

Triggering ConditionsThe Iub user plane setup procedure can be triggered in one of the following conditions:l The common transport channels are set up.

l The dedicated transport channels are set up.

ProcedureFigure 7-24 shows the Iub user plane setup procedure.

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 7 Intra-Frequency Handover Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-23

Page 122: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Figure 7-24 Iub user plane setup procedure

The procedure shown in Figure 7-24 is described as follows:

1. The CRNC uses the ALCAP protocol to send a QAAL2 ESTABLISH REQUEST messageto the NodeB.

2. The NodeB uses the ALCAP protocol to send a response message to the CRNC.l If the Iub data transport bearers are set up, the NodeB sends a QAAL2 ESTABLISH

CONFIRM message.l If an Iub data transport bearer fails to be set up, the NodeB sends a QAAL2 ESTABLISH

RELEASE CONFIRM message.

Radio Link Restoration Procedure (Inter-RNC Handover)The radio link restoration procedure for inter-RNC handover is performed for a NodeB to notifythe SRNC that the uplink synchronization of one or more radio links is achieved or re-achieved.

Triggering ConditionsThe NodeB detects UL signals from the UE. That is, the NodeB finishes UL synchronizationwith the UE.

ProcedureFigure 7-25 shows the radio link restoration procedure for inter-RNC handover.

Figure 7-25 Radio link restoration procedure (inter-RNC handover)

7 Intra-Frequency Handover ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

7-24 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 123: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

The procedure shown in Figure 7-25 is described as follows:

1. After performing UL synchronization with the UE, the NodeB sends a RADIO LINKRESTORE INDICATION message to the DRNC.

2. The DRNC sends a RADIO LINK RESTORE INDICATION message to the SRNC.

Iur User Plane Setup ProcedureThe Iur user plane setup procedure is performed to set up bearers for data transmission on theIur interface.

Triggering ConditionsThe DCHs are set up.

ProcedureFigure 7-26 shows the Iur user plane setup procedure.

Figure 7-26 Iur user plane setup procedure

The procedure shown in Figure 7-26 is described as follows:

1. The SRNC uses the ALCAP protocol to send a QAAL2 ESTABLISH REQUEST messageto the DRNC.

2. The DRNC uses the ALCAP protocol to send a response message to the SRNC.l If the Iur data transport bearers are set up, the DRNC sends a QAAL2 ESTABLISH

CONFIRM message.l If an Iur data transport bearer fails to be set up, the DRNC sends a QAAL2 ESTABLISH

RELEASE CONFIRM message.

Active Set Update ProcedureThe active set update procedure is performed to update the active set of radio links between theUE and the UTRAN.

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 7 Intra-Frequency Handover Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-25

Page 124: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Triggering ConditionsThe active set update procedure can be triggered in either of the following conditions:l Radio link addition

l Radio link deletion

ProcedureFigure 7-27 shows the active set update procedure.

Figure 7-27 Active set update procedure

The procedure shown in Figure 7-27 is described as follows:

1. The SRNC sends an ACTIVE SET UPDATE message to the UE. If a radio link needs tobe added, the message indicates radio link addition. If a radio link needs to be deleted, themessage indicates radio link deletion.

2. The UE adds or deletes the radio links according to the Radio Link Addition Informationor Radio Link Removal Information IE contained in the ACTIVE SET UPDATE message.

3. The UE sends a response message to the SRNC.l If adding or deleting the radio links successfully, the UE sends an ACTIVE SET

UPDATE COMPLETE message on the DCCH by using Acknowledged Mode (AM)Radio Link Control (RLC).

l If the ACTIVE SET UPDATE message contains the configuration not supported by theUE or if the active set does not contain the radio links specified by the Radio LinkRemoval Information IE, the UE sends an ACTIVE SET UPDATE FAILURE message.

Radio Link Deletion ProcedureThe radio link deletion procedure is performed to release resources in a NodeB for one or moreestablished radio links towards a UE.

Triggering ConditionsThe CRNC sends a RADIO LINK DELETION REQUEST message.

7 Intra-Frequency Handover ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

7-26 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 125: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

ProcedureFigure 7-28 shows the radio link deletion procedure.

Figure 7-28 Radio link deletion procedure

The procedure shown in Figure 7-28 is described as follows:

1. The CRNC sends a RADIO LINK DELETION REQUEST message to the NodeB. Afterreceiving the message, the NodeB deletes the radio links specified by the message.

2. The NodeB sends a response message to the CRNC.l If all the radio links are deleted, the NodeB sends a RADIO LINK DELETION

RESPONSE message.l If any radio link fails to be deleted, the NodeB sends a RADIO LINK DELETION

RESPONSE message. The Criticality Diagnostics field in the message indicates thefailure cause.

Iub User Plane Release ProcedureThe Iub user plane release procedure is performed to release data transport bearers from the Iubinterface.

Triggering ConditionsThe transport channels on the Iub user plane need to be removed.

ProcedureFigure 7-29 shows the Iub user plane release procedure.

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 7 Intra-Frequency Handover Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-27

Page 126: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Figure 7-29 Iub user plane release procedure

The procedure shown in Figure 7-29 is described as follows:

1. The CRNC uses the ALCAP protocol to send a QAAL2 RELEASE REQUEST messageto the NodeB.

2. The NodeB uses the ALCAP protocol to send a response message to the CRNC.l If the Iub data transport bearers are released, the NodeB sends a QAAL2 RELEASE

CONFIRM message to confirm the release.l If an Iub data transport bearer fails to be released, the NodeB sends a QAAL2 RELEASE

CONFIRM message that indicates the failure cause.

Iur User Plane Release ProcedureThe Iur user plane release procedure is performed to release data transport bearers from the Iurinterface.

Triggering ConditionsThe transport channels on the Iur user plane need to be removed.

ProcedureFigure 7-30 shows the Iur user plane release procedure.

7 Intra-Frequency Handover ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

7-28 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 127: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Figure 7-30 Iur user plane release procedure

The procedure shown in Figure 7-30 is described as follows:

1. The SRNC uses the ALCAP protocol to send a QAAL2 RELEASE REQUEST messageto the DRNC.

2. The DRNC uses the ALCAP protocol to send a response message to the SRNC.l If the Iur data transport bearers are released, the DRNC sends a QAAL2 RELEASE

CONFIRM message to confirm the release.l If an Iur data transport bearer fails to be released, the DRNC sends a QAAL2 RELEASE

CONFIRM message that indicates the failure cause.

7.5 Intra-Frequency Hard Handover Between NodeBs in anRNC

The procedure of intra-frequency hard handover between NodeBs in an RNC is performed tohand over a UE from a cell to an intra-frequency cell that is controlled by another NodeB in thesame RNC.

7.5.1 Protocols Related to Intra-Frequency Hard Handover Between NodeBs in an RNCThe procedure of intra-frequency hard handover between NodeBs in an RNC complies withsome 3GPP TS25 protocols and an ITU-T protocol.

7.5.2 Triggering Conditions of Intra-Frequency Hard Handover Between NodeBs in an RNCIntra-frequency hard handover between NodeBs in an RNC is the intra-frequency hard handoverwhere the source and target cells are controlled by different NodeBs in an RNC.

7.5.3 Signaling Procedure of a Successful Intra-Frequency Hard Handover Between NodeBs inan RNCThis describes the signaling procedure of a successful intra-frequency hard handover betweenNodeBs in an RNC. For the messages related to handover failures, refer to the elementaryprocedures.

7.5.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Procedure of Intra-Frequency Hard Handover BetweenNodeBs in an RNCThe signaling tracing function of the RNC LMT can be used to trace the signaling procedure ofan intra-frequency hard handover between NodeBs in an RNC.

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 7 Intra-Frequency Handover Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-29

Page 128: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

7.5.5 Elementary Procedures of Intra-Frequency Hard Handover Between NodeBs in an RNCThis describes the elementary procedures of intra-frequency hard handover between NodeBs inan RNC in terms of triggering conditions and signaling procedures in normal and abnormalconditions.

7.5.1 Protocols Related to Intra-Frequency Hard Handover BetweenNodeBs in an RNC

The procedure of intra-frequency hard handover between NodeBs in an RNC complies withsome 3GPP TS25 protocols and an ITU-T protocol.

The compliance protocols are as follows:l 3GPP TS25.331 "Radio Resource Control (RRC)"

l 3GPP TS25.433 "UTRAN Iub interface Node B Application Part (NBAP) signalling"

l ITU-T Q.2630 "AAL type 2 Signalling Protocol"

7.5.2 Triggering Conditions of Intra-Frequency Hard HandoverBetween NodeBs in an RNC

Intra-frequency hard handover between NodeBs in an RNC is the intra-frequency hard handoverwhere the source and target cells are controlled by different NodeBs in an RNC.

The handover is triggered when the SRNC finds that another cell has higher signal quality thanthe serving cell or that the load of the serving cell is heavy.

7.5.3 Signaling Procedure of a Successful Intra-Frequency HardHandover Between NodeBs in an RNC

This describes the signaling procedure of a successful intra-frequency hard handover betweenNodeBs in an RNC. For the messages related to handover failures, refer to the elementaryprocedures.

Figure 7-31 shows the signaling procedure of a successful intra-frequency hard handoverbetween NodeBs in an RNC.

7 Intra-Frequency Handover ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

7-30 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 129: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Figure 7-31 Signaling procedure of a successful intra-frequency hard handover between NodeBsin an RNC

Note the following information about the procedure shown in Figure 7-31:l During the handover, NodeB 1 is the source NodeB and NodeB 2 is the target NodeB.

l If IP transport is applied to the Iub interface, no ALCAP procedure is performed on the Iubinterface after radio links are set up or deleted.

7.5.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Procedure of Intra-FrequencyHard Handover Between NodeBs in an RNC

The signaling tracing function of the RNC LMT can be used to trace the signaling procedure ofan intra-frequency hard handover between NodeBs in an RNC.

Prerequisitel The RNC LMT works properly.

l You are logged in to the RNC as a user authorized to perform tracing management.

ContextTable 7-5 lists the messages to be traced.

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 7 Intra-Frequency Handover Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-31

Page 130: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Table 7-5 Messages to be traced

Interfaceand Protocolto Be Traced

Message Name on the LMT Message Name in Protocols

Uu

RRC_PH_CH_RECFG PHYSICAL CHANNELRECONFIGURATION

RRC_PH_CH_RECFG_CMP PHYSICAL CHANNELRECONFIGURATION COMPLETE

RRC_PH_CH_RECFG_FAIL PHYSICAL CHANNELRECONFIGURATION FAILURE

Iub

NBAP_RL_SETUP_REQ RADIO LINK SETUP REQUEST

NBAP_RL_SETUP_RSP RADIO LINK SETUP RESPONSE

NBAP_RL_SETUP_FAIL RADIO LINK SETUP FAILURE

NBAP_RL_RESTORE_IND RADIO LINK RESTORE INDICATION

NBAP_RL_DEL_REQ RADIO LINK DELETION REQUEST

NBAP_RL_DEL_RSP RADIO LINK DELETION RESPONSE

Q.AAL2 No message name needs to bespecified. –

Procedure

Step 1 Create a Uu tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task.Figure 7-32 shows an example of Uu signaling tracing result.

Figure 7-32 Example of Uu signaling tracing result

Step 2 Create an Iub tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task.Figure 7-33 shows an example of Iub signaling tracing result.

Figure 7-33 Example of Iub signaling tracing result

7 Intra-Frequency Handover ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

7-32 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 131: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Step 3 Create a Q.AAL2 tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task.Figure 7-34 shows an example of Q.AAL2 signaling tracing result.

Figure 7-34 Example of Q.AAL2 signaling tracing result

----End

7.5.5 Elementary Procedures of Intra-Frequency Hard HandoverBetween NodeBs in an RNC

This describes the elementary procedures of intra-frequency hard handover between NodeBs inan RNC in terms of triggering conditions and signaling procedures in normal and abnormalconditions.

7.5.5.1 Radio Link Setup Procedure (Intra-RNC Handover or GSM to WCDMA CS Handover)The radio link setup procedure (intra-RNC handover or GSM to WCDMA CS handover) isperformed to set up a radio link in an SRNC-controlled NodeB for a UE.

7.5.5.2 Iub User Plane Setup ProcedureThe Iub user plane setup procedure is performed to set up bearers for data transmission on theIub interface.

7.5.5.3 Radio Link Restoration Procedure (Intra-RNC Handover or GSM to WCDMA CSHandover)The radio link restoration procedure (intra-RNC handover or GSM to WCDMA CS handover)is performed for a NodeB to notify the CRNC that the uplink synchronization of one or moreradio links is achieved or re-achieved.

7.5.5.4 Physical Channel Reconfiguration ProcedureThe physical channel reconfiguration procedure is performed to set up, reconfigure, or releasea physical channel.

7.5.5.5 Radio Link Deletion ProcedureThe radio link deletion procedure is performed to release resources in a NodeB for one or moreestablished radio links towards a UE.

7.5.5.6 Iub User Plane Release ProcedureThe Iub user plane release procedure is performed to release data transport bearers from the Iubinterface.

Radio Link Setup Procedure (Intra-RNC Handover or GSM to WCDMA CSHandover)

The radio link setup procedure (intra-RNC handover or GSM to WCDMA CS handover) isperformed to set up a radio link in an SRNC-controlled NodeB for a UE.

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 7 Intra-Frequency Handover Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-33

Page 132: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Triggering ConditionsThe CRNC sends a RADIO LINK SETUP REQUEST message.

ProcedureFigure 7-35 shows the radio link setup procedure (intra-RNC handover or GSM to WCDMACS handover).

Figure 7-35 Radio link setup procedure (intra-RNC handover or GSM to WCDMA CShandover)

The procedure shown in Figure 7-35 is described as follows:

1. The CRNC sends a RADIO LINK SETUP REQUEST message to the NodeB. Afterreceiving the message, the NodeB reserves the necessary resources and configures the newradio link according to the parameters given in the message.

2. The NodeB sends a response message to the CRNC.l If the radio link is set up, the NodeB saves the value of the Configuration Generation

ID IE contained in the RADIO LINK SETUP REQUEST message and sends a RADIOLINK SETUP RESPONSE message.

l If the radio link fails to be set up, the NodeB sends a RADIO LINK SETUP FAILUREmessage. The message contains the failure cause.

Iub User Plane Setup ProcedureThe Iub user plane setup procedure is performed to set up bearers for data transmission on theIub interface.

Triggering ConditionsThe Iub user plane setup procedure can be triggered in one of the following conditions:l The common transport channels are set up.

l The dedicated transport channels are set up.

7 Intra-Frequency Handover ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

7-34 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 133: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Procedure

Figure 7-36 shows the Iub user plane setup procedure.

Figure 7-36 Iub user plane setup procedure

The procedure shown in Figure 7-36 is described as follows:

1. The CRNC uses the ALCAP protocol to send a QAAL2 ESTABLISH REQUEST messageto the NodeB.

2. The NodeB uses the ALCAP protocol to send a response message to the CRNC.

l If the Iub data transport bearers are set up, the NodeB sends a QAAL2 ESTABLISHCONFIRM message.

l If an Iub data transport bearer fails to be set up, the NodeB sends a QAAL2 ESTABLISHRELEASE CONFIRM message.

Radio Link Restoration Procedure (Intra-RNC Handover or GSM to WCDMA CSHandover)

The radio link restoration procedure (intra-RNC handover or GSM to WCDMA CS handover)is performed for a NodeB to notify the CRNC that the uplink synchronization of one or moreradio links is achieved or re-achieved.

Triggering Conditions

The NodeB detects UL signals from the UE. That is, the NodeB finishes UL synchronizationwith the UE.

Procedure

Figure 7-37 shows the radio link restoration procedure (intra-RNC handover or GSM toWCDMA CS handover).

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 7 Intra-Frequency Handover Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-35

Page 134: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Figure 7-37 Radio link restoration procedure (intra-RNC handover or GSM to WCDMA CShandover)

After performing UL synchronization with the UE, the NodeB sends a RADIO LINK RESTOREINDICATION message to the CRNC.

Physical Channel Reconfiguration ProcedureThe physical channel reconfiguration procedure is performed to set up, reconfigure, or releasea physical channel.

Triggering ConditionsThe SRNC sends a PHYSICAL CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION message.

ProcedureFigure 7-38 shows the physical channel reconfiguration procedure.

Figure 7-38 Physical channel reconfiguration procedure

The procedure shown in Figure 7-38 is described as follows:

1. The SRNC sends a PHYSICAL CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION message to the UE torequest reconfiguration of a physical channel.

2. The UE saves the IEs of the UE, Radio Bearer (RB), transport channel, and physicalchannel.

3. The UE sends a response message to the SRNC.

7 Intra-Frequency Handover ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

7-36 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 135: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

l If successfully reconfiguring the physical channels specified by the PHYSICALCHANNEL RECONFIGURATION message, the UE sends a PHYSICAL CHANNELRECONFIGURATION COMPLETE message on the uplink DCCH by using AM RLC.

l If failing to reconfigure the physical channels specified by the PHYSICAL CHANNELRECONFIGURATION message, the UE restores the configuration to the old physicalchannel configuration and sends a PHYSICAL CHANNEL RECONFIGURATIONFAILURE message on the DCCH by using AM RLC. The value of the Failure causeIE contained in the PHYSICAL CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION FAILUREmessage is "physical channel failure".

Radio Link Deletion ProcedureThe radio link deletion procedure is performed to release resources in a NodeB for one or moreestablished radio links towards a UE.

Triggering ConditionsThe CRNC sends a RADIO LINK DELETION REQUEST message.

ProcedureFigure 7-39 shows the radio link deletion procedure.

Figure 7-39 Radio link deletion procedure

The procedure shown in Figure 7-39 is described as follows:

1. The CRNC sends a RADIO LINK DELETION REQUEST message to the NodeB. Afterreceiving the message, the NodeB deletes the radio links specified by the message.

2. The NodeB sends a response message to the CRNC.l If all the radio links are deleted, the NodeB sends a RADIO LINK DELETION

RESPONSE message.l If any radio link fails to be deleted, the NodeB sends a RADIO LINK DELETION

RESPONSE message. The Criticality Diagnostics field in the message indicates thefailure cause.

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 7 Intra-Frequency Handover Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-37

Page 136: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Iub User Plane Release ProcedureThe Iub user plane release procedure is performed to release data transport bearers from the Iubinterface.

Triggering ConditionsThe transport channels on the Iub user plane need to be removed.

ProcedureFigure 7-40 shows the Iub user plane release procedure.

Figure 7-40 Iub user plane release procedure

The procedure shown in Figure 7-40 is described as follows:

1. The CRNC uses the ALCAP protocol to send a QAAL2 RELEASE REQUEST messageto the NodeB.

2. The NodeB uses the ALCAP protocol to send a response message to the CRNC.l If the Iub data transport bearers are released, the NodeB sends a QAAL2 RELEASE

CONFIRM message to confirm the release.l If an Iub data transport bearer fails to be released, the NodeB sends a QAAL2 RELEASE

CONFIRM message that indicates the failure cause.

7.6 Intra-Frequency Hard Handover Between RNCsThe procedure of intra-frequency hard handover between RNCs is performed to hand over a UEfrom a cell to an intra-frequency cell that is controlled by another RNC.

7.6.1 Protocols Related to Intra-Frequency Hard Handover Between RNCsThe procedure of intra-frequency hard handover between RNCs complies with some 3GPP TS25protocols and an ITU-T protocol.

7.6.2 Triggering Conditions of Intra-Frequency Hard Handover Between RNCs

7 Intra-Frequency Handover ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

7-38 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 137: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Intra-frequency hard handover between RNCs is the intra-frequency hard handover where thesource and target cells are controlled by different RNCs.

7.6.3 Signaling Procedure of a Successful Intra-Frequency Hard Handover Between RNCsThis describes the signaling procedure of a successful intra-frequency hard handover betweenRNCs. For the messages related to handover failures, refer to the elementary procedures.

7.6.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Procedure of Intra-Frequency Hard Handover BetweenRNCsThe signaling tracing function of the RNC LMT can be used to trace the signaling procedure ofan intra-frequency hard handover between RNCs.

7.6.5 Elementary Procedures of Intra-Frequency Hard Handover Between RNCsThis describes the elementary procedures of intra-frequency hard handover between RNCs interms of triggering conditions and signaling procedures in normal and abnormal conditions.

7.6.1 Protocols Related to Intra-Frequency Hard Handover BetweenRNCs

The procedure of intra-frequency hard handover between RNCs complies with some 3GPP TS25protocols and an ITU-T protocol.

The compliance protocols are as follows:l 3GPP TS25.331 "Radio Resource Control (RRC)"

l 3GPP TS25.423 "UTRAN Iur interface RNSAP signalling"

l 3GPP TS25.433 "UTRAN Iub interface Node B Application Part (NBAP) signalling"

l ITU-T Q.2630 "AAL type 2 Signalling Protocol"

7.6.2 Triggering Conditions of Intra-Frequency Hard HandoverBetween RNCs

Intra-frequency hard handover between RNCs is the intra-frequency hard handover where thesource and target cells are controlled by different RNCs.

The handover is triggered when the SRNC finds that another cell has higher signal quality thanthe serving cell or that the load of the serving cell is heavy.

7.6.3 Signaling Procedure of a Successful Intra-Frequency HardHandover Between RNCs

This describes the signaling procedure of a successful intra-frequency hard handover betweenRNCs. For the messages related to handover failures, refer to the elementary procedures.

Figure 7-41 shows the signaling procedure of a successful intra-frequency hard handoverbetween RNCs.

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 7 Intra-Frequency Handover Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-39

Page 138: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Figure 7-41 Signaling procedure of a successful intra-frequency hard handover between RNCs

Note the following information about the procedure shown in Figure 7-41:l During the handover, NodeB 1 is the source NodeB and NodeB 2 is the target NodeB.

l If IP transport is applied to the Iub interface, no ALCAP procedure is performed on the Iubinterface after radio links are set up or deleted.

l If IP transport is applied to the Iur interface, no ALCAP procedure is performed on the Iurinterface after radio links are set up or deleted.

7.6.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Procedure of Intra-FrequencyHard Handover Between RNCs

The signaling tracing function of the RNC LMT can be used to trace the signaling procedure ofan intra-frequency hard handover between RNCs.

Prerequisitel The RNC LMT works properly.

7 Intra-Frequency Handover ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

7-40 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 139: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

l You are logged in to the RNC as a user authorized to perform tracing management.

Context

Table 7-6 lists the messages to be traced.

Table 7-6 Messages to be traced

Interfaceand Protocolto Be Traced

Message Name on the LMT Message Name in Protocols

Uu

RRC_PH_CH_RECFG PHYSICAL CHANNELRECONFIGURATION

RRC_PH_CH_RECFG_CMP PHYSICAL CHANNELRECONFIGURATION COMPLETE

RRC_PH_CH_RECFG_FAIL PHYSICAL CHANNELRECONFIGURATION FAILURE

Iub

NBAP_RL_SETUP_REQ RADIO LINK SETUP REQUEST

NBAP_RL_SETUP_RSP RADIO LINK SETUP RESPONSE

NBAP_RL_SETUP_FAIL RADIO LINK SETUP FAILURE

NBAP_RL_RESTORE_IND RADIO LINK RESTORE INDICATION

NBAP_RL_DEL_REQ RADIO LINK DELETION REQUEST

NBAP_RL_DEL_RSP RADIO LINK DELETION RESPONSE

Iur

RNSAP_RL_SETUP_REQ RADIO LINK SETUP REQUEST

RNSAP_RL_SETUP_RSP RADIO LINK SETUP RESPONSE

RNSAP_RL_SETUP_FAIL RADIO LINK SETUP FAILURE

RNSAP_RL_RESTORE_IND RADIO LINK RESTORE INDICATION

Q.AAL2 No message name needs to bespecified. –

Procedure

Step 1 Create a Uu tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task.Figure 7-42 shows an example of Uu signaling tracing result.

Figure 7-42 Example of Uu signaling tracing result

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 7 Intra-Frequency Handover Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-41

Page 140: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Step 2 Create an Iub tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task.Figure 7-43 shows an example of Iub signaling tracing on the source RNC.

Figure 7-43 Example of Iub signaling tracing result (source RNC)

Figure 7-44 shows an example of Iub signaling tracing on the target RNC.

Figure 7-44 Example of Iub signaling tracing result (target RNC)

Step 3 Create an Iur tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task.Figure 7-45 shows an example of Iur signaling tracing result.

Figure 7-45 Example of Iur signaling tracing result

Step 4 Create a Q.AAL2 tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task.Figure 7-46 shows an example of Q.AAL2 signaling tracing result.

Figure 7-46 Example of Q.AAL2 signaling tracing result

----End

7 Intra-Frequency Handover ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

7-42 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 141: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

7.6.5 Elementary Procedures of Intra-Frequency Hard HandoverBetween RNCs

This describes the elementary procedures of intra-frequency hard handover between RNCs interms of triggering conditions and signaling procedures in normal and abnormal conditions.

7.6.5.1 Radio Link Setup Procedure (Inter-RNC Handover)The radio link setup procedure for inter-RNC handover is performed to set up a radio link in aDRNC-controlled NodeB for a UE.

7.6.5.2 Iub User Plane Setup ProcedureThe Iub user plane setup procedure is performed to set up bearers for data transmission on theIub interface.

7.6.5.3 Radio Link Restoration Procedure (Inter-RNC Handover)The radio link restoration procedure for inter-RNC handover is performed for a NodeB to notifythe SRNC that the uplink synchronization of one or more radio links is achieved or re-achieved.

7.6.5.4 Iur User Plane Setup ProcedureThe Iur user plane setup procedure is performed to set up bearers for data transmission on theIur interface.

7.6.5.5 Physical Channel Reconfiguration ProcedureThe physical channel reconfiguration procedure is performed to set up, reconfigure, or releasea physical channel.

7.6.5.6 Radio Link Deletion ProcedureThe radio link deletion procedure is performed to release resources in a NodeB for one or moreestablished radio links towards a UE.

7.6.5.7 Iub User Plane Release ProcedureThe Iub user plane release procedure is performed to release data transport bearers from the Iubinterface.

7.6.5.8 Iur User Plane Release ProcedureThe Iur user plane release procedure is performed to release data transport bearers from the Iurinterface.

Radio Link Setup Procedure (Inter-RNC Handover)The radio link setup procedure for inter-RNC handover is performed to set up a radio link in aDRNC-controlled NodeB for a UE.

Triggering ConditionsThe SRNC sends a RADIO LINK SETUP REQUEST message.

ProcedureFigure 7-47 shows the radio link setup procedure for inter-RNC handover.

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 7 Intra-Frequency Handover Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-43

Page 142: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Figure 7-47 Radio link setup procedure (inter-RNC handover)

The procedure shown in Figure 7-47 is described as follows:

1. The SRNC sends a RADIO LINK SETUP REQUEST message to the DRNC.2. The DRNC sends a RADIO LINK SETUP REQUEST message to the target NodeB.3. The NodeB reserves the necessary resources and configures the new radio link according

to the parameters given in the message.4. The NodeB reports the radio link setup result to the DRNC.

l If the radio link is set up, the NodeB saves the value of the Configuration GenerationID IE contained in the RADIO LINK SETUP REQUEST message and sends a RADIOLINK SETUP RESPONSE message.

l If the radio link fails to be set up, the NodeB sends a RADIO LINK SETUP FAILUREmessage.

5. The DRNC reports the radio link setup result to the SRNC.l If the radio link is set up, the DRNC sends a RADIO LINK SETUP RESPONSE

message.l If the radio link fails to be set up, the DRNC sends a RADIO LINK SETUP FAILURE

message, indicating the failure cause.

Iub User Plane Setup ProcedureThe Iub user plane setup procedure is performed to set up bearers for data transmission on theIub interface.

Triggering ConditionsThe Iub user plane setup procedure can be triggered in one of the following conditions:l The common transport channels are set up.

l The dedicated transport channels are set up.

ProcedureFigure 7-48 shows the Iub user plane setup procedure.

7 Intra-Frequency Handover ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

7-44 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 143: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Figure 7-48 Iub user plane setup procedure

The procedure shown in Figure 7-48 is described as follows:

1. The CRNC uses the ALCAP protocol to send a QAAL2 ESTABLISH REQUEST messageto the NodeB.

2. The NodeB uses the ALCAP protocol to send a response message to the CRNC.l If the Iub data transport bearers are set up, the NodeB sends a QAAL2 ESTABLISH

CONFIRM message.l If an Iub data transport bearer fails to be set up, the NodeB sends a QAAL2 ESTABLISH

RELEASE CONFIRM message.

Radio Link Restoration Procedure (Inter-RNC Handover)The radio link restoration procedure for inter-RNC handover is performed for a NodeB to notifythe SRNC that the uplink synchronization of one or more radio links is achieved or re-achieved.

Triggering ConditionsThe NodeB detects UL signals from the UE. That is, the NodeB finishes UL synchronizationwith the UE.

ProcedureFigure 7-49 shows the radio link restoration procedure for inter-RNC handover.

Figure 7-49 Radio link restoration procedure (inter-RNC handover)

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 7 Intra-Frequency Handover Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-45

Page 144: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

The procedure shown in Figure 7-49 is described as follows:

1. After performing UL synchronization with the UE, the NodeB sends a RADIO LINKRESTORE INDICATION message to the DRNC.

2. The DRNC sends a RADIO LINK RESTORE INDICATION message to the SRNC.

Iur User Plane Setup ProcedureThe Iur user plane setup procedure is performed to set up bearers for data transmission on theIur interface.

Triggering ConditionsThe DCHs are set up.

ProcedureFigure 7-50 shows the Iur user plane setup procedure.

Figure 7-50 Iur user plane setup procedure

The procedure shown in Figure 7-50 is described as follows:

1. The SRNC uses the ALCAP protocol to send a QAAL2 ESTABLISH REQUEST messageto the DRNC.

2. The DRNC uses the ALCAP protocol to send a response message to the SRNC.l If the Iur data transport bearers are set up, the DRNC sends a QAAL2 ESTABLISH

CONFIRM message.l If an Iur data transport bearer fails to be set up, the DRNC sends a QAAL2 ESTABLISH

RELEASE CONFIRM message.

Physical Channel Reconfiguration ProcedureThe physical channel reconfiguration procedure is performed to set up, reconfigure, or releasea physical channel.

7 Intra-Frequency Handover ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

7-46 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 145: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Triggering ConditionsThe SRNC sends a PHYSICAL CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION message.

ProcedureFigure 7-51 shows the physical channel reconfiguration procedure.

Figure 7-51 Physical channel reconfiguration procedure

The procedure shown in Figure 7-51 is described as follows:

1. The SRNC sends a PHYSICAL CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION message to the UE torequest reconfiguration of a physical channel.

2. The UE saves the IEs of the UE, Radio Bearer (RB), transport channel, and physicalchannel.

3. The UE sends a response message to the SRNC.l If successfully reconfiguring the physical channels specified by the PHYSICAL

CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION message, the UE sends a PHYSICAL CHANNELRECONFIGURATION COMPLETE message on the uplink DCCH by using AM RLC.

l If failing to reconfigure the physical channels specified by the PHYSICAL CHANNELRECONFIGURATION message, the UE restores the configuration to the old physicalchannel configuration and sends a PHYSICAL CHANNEL RECONFIGURATIONFAILURE message on the DCCH by using AM RLC. The value of the Failure causeIE contained in the PHYSICAL CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION FAILUREmessage is "physical channel failure".

Radio Link Deletion ProcedureThe radio link deletion procedure is performed to release resources in a NodeB for one or moreestablished radio links towards a UE.

Triggering ConditionsThe CRNC sends a RADIO LINK DELETION REQUEST message.

ProcedureFigure 7-52 shows the radio link deletion procedure.

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 7 Intra-Frequency Handover Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-47

Page 146: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Figure 7-52 Radio link deletion procedure

The procedure shown in Figure 7-52 is described as follows:

1. The CRNC sends a RADIO LINK DELETION REQUEST message to the NodeB. Afterreceiving the message, the NodeB deletes the radio links specified by the message.

2. The NodeB sends a response message to the CRNC.l If all the radio links are deleted, the NodeB sends a RADIO LINK DELETION

RESPONSE message.l If any radio link fails to be deleted, the NodeB sends a RADIO LINK DELETION

RESPONSE message. The Criticality Diagnostics field in the message indicates thefailure cause.

Iub User Plane Release ProcedureThe Iub user plane release procedure is performed to release data transport bearers from the Iubinterface.

Triggering ConditionsThe transport channels on the Iub user plane need to be removed.

ProcedureFigure 7-53 shows the Iub user plane release procedure.

7 Intra-Frequency Handover ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

7-48 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 147: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Figure 7-53 Iub user plane release procedure

The procedure shown in Figure 7-53 is described as follows:

1. The CRNC uses the ALCAP protocol to send a QAAL2 RELEASE REQUEST messageto the NodeB.

2. The NodeB uses the ALCAP protocol to send a response message to the CRNC.l If the Iub data transport bearers are released, the NodeB sends a QAAL2 RELEASE

CONFIRM message to confirm the release.l If an Iub data transport bearer fails to be released, the NodeB sends a QAAL2 RELEASE

CONFIRM message that indicates the failure cause.

Iur User Plane Release ProcedureThe Iur user plane release procedure is performed to release data transport bearers from the Iurinterface.

Triggering ConditionsThe transport channels on the Iur user plane need to be removed.

ProcedureFigure 7-54 shows the Iur user plane release procedure.

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 7 Intra-Frequency Handover Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-49

Page 148: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Figure 7-54 Iur user plane release procedure

The procedure shown in Figure 7-54 is described as follows:

1. The SRNC uses the ALCAP protocol to send a QAAL2 RELEASE REQUEST messageto the DRNC.

2. The DRNC uses the ALCAP protocol to send a response message to the SRNC.l If the Iur data transport bearers are released, the DRNC sends a QAAL2 RELEASE

CONFIRM message to confirm the release.l If an Iur data transport bearer fails to be released, the DRNC sends a QAAL2 RELEASE

CONFIRM message that indicates the failure cause.

7 Intra-Frequency Handover ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

7-50 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 149: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

8 Inter-Frequency Handover Procedure

About This Chapter

The inter-frequency handover procedure is performed to hand over a UE from the WCDMA cellthat it camps on to an inter-frequency WCDMA cell. This topic describes inter-frequencyhandover in terms of types, protocols, triggering conditions, signaling procedure of a successfulinter-frequency handover, and signaling tracing on the RNC LMT. This topic also describes theelementary procedures in terms of functions, triggering conditions, and signaling in normal andabnormal conditions.

8.1 Types of Inter-Frequency HandoverInter-frequency handovers are categorized into two types: handover within an RNC andhandover between RNCs.

8.2 Inter-Frequency Handover Between NodeBs in an RNCThe procedure of inter-frequency handover between NodeBs in an RNC is performed to handover a UE from a cell to an inter-frequency cell that is controlled by the same RNC.

8.3 Inter-Frequency Handover Between RNCsThe procedure of inter-frequency handover between RNCs is performed to hand over a UE froma cell to an inter-frequency cell that is controlled by another RNC.

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 8 Inter-Frequency Handover Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-1

Page 150: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

8.1 Types of Inter-Frequency HandoverInter-frequency handovers are categorized into two types: handover within an RNC andhandover between RNCs.

Table 8-1 lists the types of inter-frequency handover.

Table 8-1 Types of inter-frequency handover

Type Subtype Description

Inter-frequencyhandoverwithin anRNC

Inter-frequency handoverwithin a NodeB The procedures of the two subtypes are

similar. They are described in theprocedure of inter-frequency handoverbetween NodeBs in an RNC.

Inter-frequency handoverbetween NodeBs

Inter-frequencyhandoverbetweenRNCs

Inter-frequency handoverbetween RNCs withoutrelocation

When a UE performs an inter-frequencyhandover between RNCs with UE-not-involved relocation, an Iur interface mustbe configured between the two RNCs.When a UE performs an inter-frequencyhandover between RNCs with UE-involved relocation, no Iur interface existsbetween the two RNCs.

Inter-frequency handoverbetween RNCs with UE-not-involved relocation

Inter-frequency handoverbetween RNCs with UE-involved relocation

8.2 Inter-Frequency Handover Between NodeBs in an RNCThe procedure of inter-frequency handover between NodeBs in an RNC is performed to handover a UE from a cell to an inter-frequency cell that is controlled by the same RNC.

8.2.1 Protocols Related to Inter-Frequency Handover Between NodeBs in an RNCThe procedure of inter-frequency handover between NodeBs in an RNC complies with some3GPP TS25 protocols and an ITU-T protocol.

8.2.2 Triggering Conditions of Inter-Frequency Handover Between NodeBs in an RNCInter-frequency handover between NodeBs in an RNC is the inter-frequency handover wherethe source and target cells are controlled by different NodeBs in an RNC.

8.2.3 Signaling Procedure of a Successful Inter-Frequency Handover Between NodeBs in anRNCThis describes the signaling procedure of a successful inter-frequency handover betweenNodeBs in an RNC. For the messages related to handover failures, refer to the elementaryprocedures.

8.2.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Procedure of Inter-Frequency Handover BetweenNodeBs in an RNCThe signaling tracing function of the RNC LMT can be used to trace the signaling procedure ofan inter-frequency handover between NodeBs in an RNC.

8 Inter-Frequency Handover ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

8-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 151: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

8.2.5 Elementary Procedures of Inter-Frequency Handover Between NodeBs in an RNCThis describes the elementary procedures of inter-frequency handover between NodeBs in anRNC in terms of triggering conditions and signaling procedures in normal and abnormalconditions.

8.2.1 Protocols Related to Inter-Frequency Handover BetweenNodeBs in an RNC

The procedure of inter-frequency handover between NodeBs in an RNC complies with some3GPP TS25 protocols and an ITU-T protocol.

The compliance protocols are as follows:l 3GPP TS25.331 "Radio Resource Control (RRC)"

l 3GPP TS25.433 "UTRAN Iub interface Node B Application Part (NBAP) signalling"

l ITU-T Q.2630 "AAL type 2 Signalling Protocol"

8.2.2 Triggering Conditions of Inter-Frequency Handover BetweenNodeBs in an RNC

Inter-frequency handover between NodeBs in an RNC is the inter-frequency handover wherethe source and target cells are controlled by different NodeBs in an RNC.

The handover is triggered when the signal quality of the serving cell is degraded or the load ofthe serving cell is heavy.

8.2.3 Signaling Procedure of a Successful Inter-FrequencyHandover Between NodeBs in an RNC

This describes the signaling procedure of a successful inter-frequency handover betweenNodeBs in an RNC. For the messages related to handover failures, refer to the elementaryprocedures.

Figure 8-1 shows the signaling procedure of a successful inter-frequency handover betweenNodeBs in an RNC.

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 8 Inter-Frequency Handover Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-3

Page 152: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Figure 8-1 Signaling procedure of a successful inter-frequency handover between NodeBs inan RNC

Note the following information about the procedure shown in Figure 8-1:l The radio link setup procedure shown in the figure applies when the source and target cells

of the handover are controlled by different NodeBs. If the source and target cells arecontrolled by the same NodeB, the radio link setup procedure should be replaced by theradio link addition procedure, and the radio link restoration procedure is excluded.

l During the handover, NodeB 1 is the source NodeB and NodeB 2 is the target NodeB.

l If IP transport is applied to the Iub interface, no ALCAP procedure is performed on the Iubinterface after radio links are set up or deleted.

8.2.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Procedure of Inter-FrequencyHandover Between NodeBs in an RNC

The signaling tracing function of the RNC LMT can be used to trace the signaling procedure ofan inter-frequency handover between NodeBs in an RNC.

Prerequisitel The RNC LMT works properly.

l You are logged in to the RNC as a user authorized to perform tracing management.

ContextTable 8-2 lists the messages to be traced.

8 Inter-Frequency Handover ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

8-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 153: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Table 8-2 Messages to be traced

Interfaceand Protocolto Be Traced

Message Name on the LMT Message Name in Protocols

Uu

RRC_PH_CH_RECFG PHYSICAL CHANNELRECONFIGURATION

RRC_PH_CH_RECFG_CMP PHYSICAL CHANNELRECONFIGURATION COMPLETE

RRC_PH_CH_RECFG_FAIL PHYSICAL CHANNELRECONFIGURATION FAILURE

Iub

NBAP_RL_ADD_REQ RADIO LINK ADDITION REQUEST

NBAP_RL_ADD_RSP RADIO LINK ADDITION RESPONSE

NBAP_RL_ADD_FAIL RADIO LINK ADDITION FAILURE

NBAP_RL_SETUP_REQ RADIO LINK SETUP REQUEST

NBAP_RL_SETUP_RSP RADIO LINK SETUP RESPONSE

NBAP_RL_SETUP_FAIL RADIO LINK SETUP FAILURE

NBAP_RL_RESTORE_IND RADIO LINK RESTORE INDICATION

NBAP_RL_DEL_REQ RADIO LINK DELETION REQUEST

NBAP_RL_DEL_RSP RADIO LINK DELETION RESPONSE

Q.AAL2 No message name needs to bespecified. –

ProcedureStep 1 Create a Uu tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task.

Figure 8-2 shows an example of Uu signaling tracing result.

Figure 8-2 Example of Uu signaling tracing result

Step 2 Create an Iub tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task.Figure 8-3 shows an example of Iub signaling tracing result.

Figure 8-3 Example of Iub signaling tracing result

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 8 Inter-Frequency Handover Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-5

Page 154: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Step 3 Create a Q.AAL2 tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task.Figure 8-4 shows an example of Q.AAL2 signaling tracing result.

Figure 8-4 Example of Q.AAL2 signaling tracing result

----End

8.2.5 Elementary Procedures of Inter-Frequency Handover BetweenNodeBs in an RNC

This describes the elementary procedures of inter-frequency handover between NodeBs in anRNC in terms of triggering conditions and signaling procedures in normal and abnormalconditions.

8.2.5.1 Radio Link Addition ProcedureThe radio link addition procedure is performed to add one or more radio links towards a UE.

8.2.5.2 Radio Link Setup Procedure (Intra-RNC Handover or GSM to WCDMA CS Handover)The radio link setup procedure (intra-RNC handover or GSM to WCDMA CS handover) isperformed to set up a radio link in an SRNC-controlled NodeB for a UE.

8.2.5.3 Iub User Plane Setup ProcedureThe Iub user plane setup procedure is performed to set up bearers for data transmission on theIub interface.

8.2.5.4 Radio Link Restoration Procedure (Intra-RNC Handover or GSM to WCDMA CSHandover)The radio link restoration procedure (intra-RNC handover or GSM to WCDMA CS handover)is performed for a NodeB to notify the CRNC that the uplink synchronization of one or moreradio links is achieved or re-achieved.

8.2.5.5 Physical Channel Reconfiguration ProcedureThe physical channel reconfiguration procedure is performed to set up, reconfigure, or releasea physical channel.

8.2.5.6 Radio Link Deletion ProcedureThe radio link deletion procedure is performed to release resources in a NodeB for one or moreestablished radio links towards a UE.

8.2.5.7 Iub User Plane Release ProcedureThe Iub user plane release procedure is performed to release data transport bearers from the Iubinterface.

Radio Link Addition ProcedureThe radio link addition procedure is performed to add one or more radio links towards a UE.

8 Inter-Frequency Handover ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

8-6 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 155: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Triggering ConditionsThe CRNC sends a RADIO LINK ADDITION REQUEST message.

ProcedureFigure 8-5 shows the radio link addition procedure.

Figure 8-5 Radio link addition procedure

The procedure shown in Figure 8-5 is described as follows:

1. The CRNC sends a RADIO LINK ADDITION REQUEST message to the NodeB. Afterreceiving the message, the NodeB reserves the necessary resources and configures the newradio link or links according to the parameters given in the message.

2. The NodeB sends a response message to the CRNC.l If all the requested radio links are added, the NodeB saves the value of the Configuration

Generation ID IE contained in the RADIO LINK ADDITION REQUEST message andsends a RADIO LINK ADDITION RESPONSE message.

l If any radio link fails to be added, the NodeB sends a RADIO LINK ADDITIONFAILURE message. The message contains the failure cause in the Cause IE.

Radio Link Setup Procedure (Intra-RNC Handover or GSM to WCDMA CSHandover)

The radio link setup procedure (intra-RNC handover or GSM to WCDMA CS handover) isperformed to set up a radio link in an SRNC-controlled NodeB for a UE.

Triggering ConditionsThe CRNC sends a RADIO LINK SETUP REQUEST message.

ProcedureFigure 8-6 shows the radio link setup procedure (intra-RNC handover or GSM to WCDMA CShandover).

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 8 Inter-Frequency Handover Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-7

Page 156: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Figure 8-6 Radio link setup procedure (intra-RNC handover or GSM to WCDMA CS handover)

The procedure shown in Figure 8-6 is described as follows:

1. The CRNC sends a RADIO LINK SETUP REQUEST message to the NodeB. Afterreceiving the message, the NodeB reserves the necessary resources and configures the newradio link according to the parameters given in the message.

2. The NodeB sends a response message to the CRNC.l If the radio link is set up, the NodeB saves the value of the Configuration Generation

ID IE contained in the RADIO LINK SETUP REQUEST message and sends a RADIOLINK SETUP RESPONSE message.

l If the radio link fails to be set up, the NodeB sends a RADIO LINK SETUP FAILUREmessage. The message contains the failure cause.

Iub User Plane Setup ProcedureThe Iub user plane setup procedure is performed to set up bearers for data transmission on theIub interface.

Triggering ConditionsThe Iub user plane setup procedure can be triggered in one of the following conditions:l The common transport channels are set up.

l The dedicated transport channels are set up.

ProcedureFigure 8-7 shows the Iub user plane setup procedure.

8 Inter-Frequency Handover ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

8-8 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 157: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Figure 8-7 Iub user plane setup procedure

The procedure shown in Figure 8-7 is described as follows:

1. The CRNC uses the ALCAP protocol to send a QAAL2 ESTABLISH REQUEST messageto the NodeB.

2. The NodeB uses the ALCAP protocol to send a response message to the CRNC.l If the Iub data transport bearers are set up, the NodeB sends a QAAL2 ESTABLISH

CONFIRM message.l If an Iub data transport bearer fails to be set up, the NodeB sends a QAAL2 ESTABLISH

RELEASE CONFIRM message.

Radio Link Restoration Procedure (Intra-RNC Handover or GSM to WCDMA CSHandover)

The radio link restoration procedure (intra-RNC handover or GSM to WCDMA CS handover)is performed for a NodeB to notify the CRNC that the uplink synchronization of one or moreradio links is achieved or re-achieved.

Triggering ConditionsThe NodeB detects UL signals from the UE. That is, the NodeB finishes UL synchronizationwith the UE.

ProcedureFigure 8-8 shows the radio link restoration procedure (intra-RNC handover or GSM to WCDMACS handover).

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 8 Inter-Frequency Handover Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-9

Page 158: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Figure 8-8 Radio link restoration procedure (intra-RNC handover or GSM to WCDMA CShandover)

After performing UL synchronization with the UE, the NodeB sends a RADIO LINK RESTOREINDICATION message to the CRNC.

Physical Channel Reconfiguration ProcedureThe physical channel reconfiguration procedure is performed to set up, reconfigure, or releasea physical channel.

Triggering ConditionsThe SRNC sends a PHYSICAL CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION message.

ProcedureFigure 8-9 shows the physical channel reconfiguration procedure.

Figure 8-9 Physical channel reconfiguration procedure

The procedure shown in Figure 8-9 is described as follows:

1. The SRNC sends a PHYSICAL CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION message to the UE torequest reconfiguration of a physical channel.

2. The UE saves the IEs of the UE, Radio Bearer (RB), transport channel, and physicalchannel.

3. The UE sends a response message to the SRNC.

8 Inter-Frequency Handover ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

8-10 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 159: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

l If successfully reconfiguring the physical channels specified by the PHYSICALCHANNEL RECONFIGURATION message, the UE sends a PHYSICAL CHANNELRECONFIGURATION COMPLETE message on the uplink DCCH by using AM RLC.

l If failing to reconfigure the physical channels specified by the PHYSICAL CHANNELRECONFIGURATION message, the UE restores the configuration to the old physicalchannel configuration and sends a PHYSICAL CHANNEL RECONFIGURATIONFAILURE message on the DCCH by using AM RLC. The value of the Failure causeIE contained in the PHYSICAL CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION FAILUREmessage is "physical channel failure".

Radio Link Deletion ProcedureThe radio link deletion procedure is performed to release resources in a NodeB for one or moreestablished radio links towards a UE.

Triggering ConditionsThe CRNC sends a RADIO LINK DELETION REQUEST message.

ProcedureFigure 8-10 shows the radio link deletion procedure.

Figure 8-10 Radio link deletion procedure

The procedure shown in Figure 8-10 is described as follows:

1. The CRNC sends a RADIO LINK DELETION REQUEST message to the NodeB. Afterreceiving the message, the NodeB deletes the radio links specified by the message.

2. The NodeB sends a response message to the CRNC.l If all the radio links are deleted, the NodeB sends a RADIO LINK DELETION

RESPONSE message.l If any radio link fails to be deleted, the NodeB sends a RADIO LINK DELETION

RESPONSE message. The Criticality Diagnostics field in the message indicates thefailure cause.

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 8 Inter-Frequency Handover Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-11

Page 160: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Iub User Plane Release ProcedureThe Iub user plane release procedure is performed to release data transport bearers from the Iubinterface.

Triggering ConditionsThe transport channels on the Iub user plane need to be removed.

ProcedureFigure 8-11 shows the Iub user plane release procedure.

Figure 8-11 Iub user plane release procedure

The procedure shown in Figure 8-11 is described as follows:

1. The CRNC uses the ALCAP protocol to send a QAAL2 RELEASE REQUEST messageto the NodeB.

2. The NodeB uses the ALCAP protocol to send a response message to the CRNC.l If the Iub data transport bearers are released, the NodeB sends a QAAL2 RELEASE

CONFIRM message to confirm the release.l If an Iub data transport bearer fails to be released, the NodeB sends a QAAL2 RELEASE

CONFIRM message that indicates the failure cause.

8.3 Inter-Frequency Handover Between RNCsThe procedure of inter-frequency handover between RNCs is performed to hand over a UE froma cell to an inter-frequency cell that is controlled by another RNC.

8.3.1 Protocols Related to Inter-Frequency Handover Between RNCsThe procedure of inter-frequency handover between RNCs complies with some 3GPP TS25protocols and an ITU-T protocol.

8.3.2 Triggering Conditions of Inter-Frequency Handover Between RNCs

8 Inter-Frequency Handover ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

8-12 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 161: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Inter-frequency handover between RNCs is the inter-frequency handover where the source andtarget cells are controlled by different RNCs.

8.3.3 Signaling Procedure of a Successful Inter-Frequency Handover Between RNCsThis describes the signaling procedure of a successful inter-frequency handover between RNCs.For the messages related to handover failures, refer to the elementary procedures.

8.3.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Procedure of Inter-Frequency Handover Between RNCsThe signaling tracing function of the RNC LMT can be used to trace the signaling procedure ofan inter-frequency handover between RNCs.

8.3.5 Elementary Procedures of Inter-Frequency Handover Between RNCsThis describes the elementary procedures of inter-frequency handover between RNCs in termsof triggering conditions and signaling procedures in normal and abnormal conditions.

8.3.1 Protocols Related to Inter-Frequency Handover BetweenRNCs

The procedure of inter-frequency handover between RNCs complies with some 3GPP TS25protocols and an ITU-T protocol.

The compliance protocols are as follows:l 3GPP TS25.331 "Radio Resource Control (RRC)"

l 3GPP TS25.423 "UTRAN Iur interface RNSANP signalling"

l 3GPP TS25.433 "UTRAN Iub interface Node B Application Part (NBAP) signalling"

l ITU-T Q.2630 "AAL type 2 Signalling Protocol"

8.3.2 Triggering Conditions of Inter-Frequency Handover BetweenRNCs

Inter-frequency handover between RNCs is the inter-frequency handover where the source andtarget cells are controlled by different RNCs.

The handover is triggered when the signal quality of the serving cell is degraded or the load ofthe serving cell is heavy.

8.3.3 Signaling Procedure of a Successful Inter-FrequencyHandover Between RNCs

This describes the signaling procedure of a successful inter-frequency handover between RNCs.For the messages related to handover failures, refer to the elementary procedures.

Figure 8-12 shows the signaling procedure of a successful inter-frequency handover betweenRNCs.

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 8 Inter-Frequency Handover Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-13

Page 162: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Figure 8-12 Signaling procedure of a successful inter-frequency handover between RNCs

Note the following information about the procedure shown in Figure 8-12:l During the handover, NodeB 1 is the source NodeB and NodeB 2 is the target NodeB.

l If IP transport is applied to the Iub interface, no ALCAP procedure is performed on the Iubinterface after radio links are set up or deleted.

l If IP transport is applied to the Iur interface, no ALCAP procedure is performed on the Iurinterface after radio links are set up or deleted.

8.3.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Procedure of Inter-FrequencyHandover Between RNCs

The signaling tracing function of the RNC LMT can be used to trace the signaling procedure ofan inter-frequency handover between RNCs.

Prerequisitel The RNC LMT works properly.

l You are logged in to the RNC as a user authorized to perform tracing management.

8 Inter-Frequency Handover ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

8-14 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 163: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

ContextTable 8-3 lists the messages to be traced.

Table 8-3 Messages to be traced

Interfaceand Protocolto Be Traced

Message Name on the LMT Message Name in Protocols

Uu

RRC_PH_CH_RECFG PHYSICAL CHANNELRECONFIGURATION

RRC_PH_CH_RECFG_CMP PHYSICAL CHANNELRECONFIGURATION COMPLETE

RRC_PH_CH_RECFG_FAIL PHYSICAL CHANNELRECONFIGURATION FAILURE

Iub

NBAP_RL_SETUP_REQ RADIO LINK SETUP REQUEST

NBAP_RL_SETUP_RSP RADIO LINK SETUP RESPONSE

NBAP_RL_SETUP_FAIL RADIO LINK SETUP FAILURE

NBAP_RL_RESTORE_IND RADIO LINK RESTORE INDICATION

NBAP_RL_DEL_REQ RADIO LINK DELETION REQUEST

NBAP_RL_DEL_RSP RADIO LINK DELETION RESPONSE

Iur

RNSAP_RL_SETUP_REQ RADIO LINK SETUP REQUEST

RNSAP_RL_SETUP_RSP RADIO LINK SETUP RESPONSE

RNSAP_RL_SETUP_FAIL RADIO LINK SETUP FAILURE

RNSAP_RL_RESTORE_IND RADIO LINK RESTORE INDICATION

Q.AAL2 No message name needs to bespecified. –

Procedure

Step 1 Create a Uu tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task.Figure 8-13 shows an example of Uu signaling tracing result.

Figure 8-13 Example of Uu signaling tracing result

Step 2 Create an Iub tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task.Figure 8-14 shows an example of Iub signaling tracing on the source RNC.

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 8 Inter-Frequency Handover Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-15

Page 164: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Figure 8-14 Example of Iub signaling tracing result (source RNC)

Figure 8-15 shows an example of Iub signaling tracing on the target RNC.

Figure 8-15 Example of Iub signaling tracing result (target RNC)

Step 3 Create an Iur tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task.Figure 8-16 shows an example of Iur signaling tracing result.

Figure 8-16 Example of Iur signaling tracing result

Step 4 Create a Q.AAL2 tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task.Figure 8-17 shows an example of Q.AAL2 signaling tracing result.

Figure 8-17 Example of Q.AAL2 signaling tracing result

----End

8.3.5 Elementary Procedures of Inter-Frequency Handover BetweenRNCs

This describes the elementary procedures of inter-frequency handover between RNCs in termsof triggering conditions and signaling procedures in normal and abnormal conditions.

8.3.5.1 Radio Link Setup Procedure (Inter-RNC Handover)

8 Inter-Frequency Handover ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

8-16 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 165: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

The radio link setup procedure for inter-RNC handover is performed to set up a radio link in aDRNC-controlled NodeB for a UE.8.3.5.2 Iub User Plane Setup ProcedureThe Iub user plane setup procedure is performed to set up bearers for data transmission on theIub interface.8.3.5.3 Radio Link Restoration Procedure (Inter-RNC Handover)The radio link restoration procedure for inter-RNC handover is performed for a NodeB to notifythe SRNC that the uplink synchronization of one or more radio links is achieved or re-achieved.8.3.5.4 Iur User Plane Setup ProcedureThe Iur user plane setup procedure is performed to set up bearers for data transmission on theIur interface.8.3.5.5 Physical Channel Reconfiguration ProcedureThe physical channel reconfiguration procedure is performed to set up, reconfigure, or releasea physical channel.8.3.5.6 Radio Link Deletion ProcedureThe radio link deletion procedure is performed to release resources in a NodeB for one or moreestablished radio links towards a UE.8.3.5.7 Iub User Plane Release ProcedureThe Iub user plane release procedure is performed to release data transport bearers from the Iubinterface.8.3.5.8 Iur User Plane Release ProcedureThe Iur user plane release procedure is performed to release data transport bearers from the Iurinterface.

Radio Link Setup Procedure (Inter-RNC Handover)The radio link setup procedure for inter-RNC handover is performed to set up a radio link in aDRNC-controlled NodeB for a UE.

Triggering ConditionsThe SRNC sends a RADIO LINK SETUP REQUEST message.

ProcedureFigure 8-18 shows the radio link setup procedure for inter-RNC handover.

Figure 8-18 Radio link setup procedure (inter-RNC handover)

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 8 Inter-Frequency Handover Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-17

Page 166: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

The procedure shown in Figure 8-18 is described as follows:

1. The SRNC sends a RADIO LINK SETUP REQUEST message to the DRNC.2. The DRNC sends a RADIO LINK SETUP REQUEST message to the target NodeB.3. The NodeB reserves the necessary resources and configures the new radio link according

to the parameters given in the message.4. The NodeB reports the radio link setup result to the DRNC.

l If the radio link is set up, the NodeB saves the value of the Configuration GenerationID IE contained in the RADIO LINK SETUP REQUEST message and sends a RADIOLINK SETUP RESPONSE message.

l If the radio link fails to be set up, the NodeB sends a RADIO LINK SETUP FAILUREmessage.

5. The DRNC reports the radio link setup result to the SRNC.l If the radio link is set up, the DRNC sends a RADIO LINK SETUP RESPONSE

message.l If the radio link fails to be set up, the DRNC sends a RADIO LINK SETUP FAILURE

message, indicating the failure cause.

Iub User Plane Setup ProcedureThe Iub user plane setup procedure is performed to set up bearers for data transmission on theIub interface.

Triggering ConditionsThe Iub user plane setup procedure can be triggered in one of the following conditions:l The common transport channels are set up.l The dedicated transport channels are set up.

ProcedureFigure 8-19 shows the Iub user plane setup procedure.

Figure 8-19 Iub user plane setup procedure

8 Inter-Frequency Handover ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

8-18 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 167: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

The procedure shown in Figure 8-19 is described as follows:

1. The CRNC uses the ALCAP protocol to send a QAAL2 ESTABLISH REQUEST messageto the NodeB.

2. The NodeB uses the ALCAP protocol to send a response message to the CRNC.l If the Iub data transport bearers are set up, the NodeB sends a QAAL2 ESTABLISH

CONFIRM message.l If an Iub data transport bearer fails to be set up, the NodeB sends a QAAL2 ESTABLISH

RELEASE CONFIRM message.

Radio Link Restoration Procedure (Inter-RNC Handover)The radio link restoration procedure for inter-RNC handover is performed for a NodeB to notifythe SRNC that the uplink synchronization of one or more radio links is achieved or re-achieved.

Triggering ConditionsThe NodeB detects UL signals from the UE. That is, the NodeB finishes UL synchronizationwith the UE.

ProcedureFigure 8-20 shows the radio link restoration procedure for inter-RNC handover.

Figure 8-20 Radio link restoration procedure (inter-RNC handover)

The procedure shown in Figure 8-20 is described as follows:

1. After performing UL synchronization with the UE, the NodeB sends a RADIO LINKRESTORE INDICATION message to the DRNC.

2. The DRNC sends a RADIO LINK RESTORE INDICATION message to the SRNC.

Iur User Plane Setup ProcedureThe Iur user plane setup procedure is performed to set up bearers for data transmission on theIur interface.

Triggering ConditionsThe DCHs are set up.

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 8 Inter-Frequency Handover Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-19

Page 168: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

ProcedureFigure 8-21 shows the Iur user plane setup procedure.

Figure 8-21 Iur user plane setup procedure

The procedure shown in Figure 8-21 is described as follows:

1. The SRNC uses the ALCAP protocol to send a QAAL2 ESTABLISH REQUEST messageto the DRNC.

2. The DRNC uses the ALCAP protocol to send a response message to the SRNC.l If the Iur data transport bearers are set up, the DRNC sends a QAAL2 ESTABLISH

CONFIRM message.l If an Iur data transport bearer fails to be set up, the DRNC sends a QAAL2 ESTABLISH

RELEASE CONFIRM message.

Physical Channel Reconfiguration ProcedureThe physical channel reconfiguration procedure is performed to set up, reconfigure, or releasea physical channel.

Triggering ConditionsThe SRNC sends a PHYSICAL CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION message.

ProcedureFigure 8-22 shows the physical channel reconfiguration procedure.

8 Inter-Frequency Handover ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

8-20 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 169: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Figure 8-22 Physical channel reconfiguration procedure

The procedure shown in Figure 8-22 is described as follows:

1. The SRNC sends a PHYSICAL CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION message to the UE torequest reconfiguration of a physical channel.

2. The UE saves the IEs of the UE, Radio Bearer (RB), transport channel, and physicalchannel.

3. The UE sends a response message to the SRNC.l If successfully reconfiguring the physical channels specified by the PHYSICAL

CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION message, the UE sends a PHYSICAL CHANNELRECONFIGURATION COMPLETE message on the uplink DCCH by using AM RLC.

l If failing to reconfigure the physical channels specified by the PHYSICAL CHANNELRECONFIGURATION message, the UE restores the configuration to the old physicalchannel configuration and sends a PHYSICAL CHANNEL RECONFIGURATIONFAILURE message on the DCCH by using AM RLC. The value of the Failure causeIE contained in the PHYSICAL CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION FAILUREmessage is "physical channel failure".

Radio Link Deletion ProcedureThe radio link deletion procedure is performed to release resources in a NodeB for one or moreestablished radio links towards a UE.

Triggering ConditionsThe CRNC sends a RADIO LINK DELETION REQUEST message.

ProcedureFigure 8-23 shows the radio link deletion procedure.

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 8 Inter-Frequency Handover Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-21

Page 170: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Figure 8-23 Radio link deletion procedure

The procedure shown in Figure 8-23 is described as follows:

1. The CRNC sends a RADIO LINK DELETION REQUEST message to the NodeB. Afterreceiving the message, the NodeB deletes the radio links specified by the message.

2. The NodeB sends a response message to the CRNC.l If all the radio links are deleted, the NodeB sends a RADIO LINK DELETION

RESPONSE message.l If any radio link fails to be deleted, the NodeB sends a RADIO LINK DELETION

RESPONSE message. The Criticality Diagnostics field in the message indicates thefailure cause.

Iub User Plane Release ProcedureThe Iub user plane release procedure is performed to release data transport bearers from the Iubinterface.

Triggering ConditionsThe transport channels on the Iub user plane need to be removed.

ProcedureFigure 8-24 shows the Iub user plane release procedure.

8 Inter-Frequency Handover ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

8-22 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 171: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Figure 8-24 Iub user plane release procedure

The procedure shown in Figure 8-24 is described as follows:

1. The CRNC uses the ALCAP protocol to send a QAAL2 RELEASE REQUEST messageto the NodeB.

2. The NodeB uses the ALCAP protocol to send a response message to the CRNC.l If the Iub data transport bearers are released, the NodeB sends a QAAL2 RELEASE

CONFIRM message to confirm the release.l If an Iub data transport bearer fails to be released, the NodeB sends a QAAL2 RELEASE

CONFIRM message that indicates the failure cause.

Iur User Plane Release ProcedureThe Iur user plane release procedure is performed to release data transport bearers from the Iurinterface.

Triggering ConditionsThe transport channels on the Iur user plane need to be removed.

ProcedureFigure 8-25 shows the Iur user plane release procedure.

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 8 Inter-Frequency Handover Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-23

Page 172: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Figure 8-25 Iur user plane release procedure

The procedure shown in Figure 8-25 is described as follows:

1. The SRNC uses the ALCAP protocol to send a QAAL2 RELEASE REQUEST messageto the DRNC.

2. The DRNC uses the ALCAP protocol to send a response message to the SRNC.l If the Iur data transport bearers are released, the DRNC sends a QAAL2 RELEASE

CONFIRM message to confirm the release.l If an Iur data transport bearer fails to be released, the DRNC sends a QAAL2 RELEASE

CONFIRM message that indicates the failure cause.

8 Inter-Frequency Handover ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

8-24 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 173: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

9 Inter-RAT Handover Procedure

About This Chapter

The inter-RAT handover procedure is performed to hand over a UE from a WCDMA cell to aGSM cell or the other way round. This topic describes inter-RAT handover in terms of types,protocols, triggering conditions, signaling procedure of a successful inter-RAT handover, andsignaling tracing on the RNC LMT. This topic also describes the elementary procedures in termsof functions, triggering conditions, and signaling in normal and abnormal conditions.

9.1 Types of Inter-RAT HandoverBased on the direction of handover, inter-RAT handovers are categorized into two types: inter-RAT handover from WCDMA to GSM and inter-RAT handover from GSM to WCDMA.

9.2 Inter-RAT CS Handover from WCDMA to GSMThe procedure of inter-RAT CS handover from WCDMA to GSM is performed to hand overthe CS services of a UE from the WCDMA system to the GSM system.

9.3 Inter-RAT CS Handover from GSM to WCDMAThe procedure of inter-RAT CS handover from GSM to WCDMA is performed to hand overthe CS services of a UE from the GSM system to the WCDMA system.

9.4 Inter-RAT PS Handover from WCDMA to GSMThe procedure of inter-RAT PS handover from WCDMA to GSM is performed to hand over thePS services of a UE from the WCDMA system to the GSM system.

9.5 Inter-RAT PS Handover from GSM to WCDMAThe procedure of inter-RAT PS handover from GSM to WCDMA is performed through cellreselection to WCDMA that is initiated by the UE.

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 9 Inter-RAT Handover Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-1

Page 174: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

9.1 Types of Inter-RAT HandoverBased on the direction of handover, inter-RAT handovers are categorized into two types: inter-RAT handover from WCDMA to GSM and inter-RAT handover from GSM to WCDMA.

Based on domains, inter-RAT handovers from WCDMA to GSM and those from GSM toWCDMA are further categorized into the following types:

l Inter-RAT CS handover from WCDMA to GSM

l Inter-RAT PS handover from WCDMA to GSM

l Inter-RAT CS handover from GSM to WCDMA

l Inter-RAT PS handover from GSM to WCDMA

9.2 Inter-RAT CS Handover from WCDMA to GSMThe procedure of inter-RAT CS handover from WCDMA to GSM is performed to hand overthe CS services of a UE from the WCDMA system to the GSM system.

9.2.1 Protocols Related to Inter-RAT CS Handover from WCDMA to GSMThe procedure of inter-RAT CS handover from WCDMA to GSM complies with some 3GPPTS25 protocols.

9.2.2 Triggering Conditions of Inter-RAT CS Handover from WCDMA to GSMThe signal quality of the WCDMA cell that the UE camps on is dissatisfactory or the load ofthe serving cell is heavy.

9.2.3 Signaling Procedure of a Successful Inter-RAT CS Handover from WCDMA to GSMThis describes the signaling procedure of a successful inter-RAT CS handover from WCDMAto GSM. For the messages related to handover failures, refer to the elementary procedures.

9.2.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Procedure of Inter-RAT CS Handover from WCDMAto GSMThe signaling tracing function of the RNC LMT can be used to trace the signaling procedure ofan inter-RAT CS handover from WCDMA to GSM.

9.2.5 Elementary Procedures of Inter-RAT CS Handover from WCDMA to GSMThis describes the elementary procedures of inter-RAT CS handover from WCDMA to GSMin terms of triggering conditions and signaling procedures in normal and abnormal conditions.

9.2.1 Protocols Related to Inter-RAT CS Handover from WCDMAto GSM

The procedure of inter-RAT CS handover from WCDMA to GSM complies with some 3GPPTS25 protocols.

The compliance protocols are as follows:

l 3GPP TS25.331 "Radio Resource Control (RRC)"

l 3GPP TS25.413 "UTRAN Iu interface RANAP signalling"

l 3GPP TS25.433 "UTRAN Iub interface Node B Application Part (NBAP) signalling"

9 Inter-RAT Handover ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

9-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 175: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

9.2.2 Triggering Conditions of Inter-RAT CS Handover fromWCDMA to GSM

The signal quality of the WCDMA cell that the UE camps on is dissatisfactory or the load ofthe serving cell is heavy.

In such a condition, if the signal quality of a neighboring GSM cell is satisfactory and its loadis relatively light, the UE will be handed over from the WCDMA cell to the GSM cell.

9.2.3 Signaling Procedure of a Successful Inter-RAT CS Handoverfrom WCDMA to GSM

This describes the signaling procedure of a successful inter-RAT CS handover from WCDMAto GSM. For the messages related to handover failures, refer to the elementary procedures.

Figure 9-1 shows the signaling procedure of a successful inter-RAT CS handover fromWCDMA to GSM.

Figure 9-1 Signaling procedure of a successful inter-RAT CS handover from WCDMA to GSM

Note the following information about the procedure shown in Figure 9-1:

l This figure presents only a brief of the signaling between the MSC server and the MSC(GSM) and that between the MSC (GSM) and the BSC (GSM).

l The SRNC sends a HANDOVER FROM UTRAN COMMAND message to the UE. Themessage contains the RAB ID, the activation time, the GSM frequency, and the GSMinformation in bit strings.

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 9 Inter-RAT Handover Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-3

Page 176: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

9.2.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Procedure of Inter-RAT CSHandover from WCDMA to GSM

The signaling tracing function of the RNC LMT can be used to trace the signaling procedure ofan inter-RAT CS handover from WCDMA to GSM.

Prerequisitel The RNC LMT works properly.

l You are logged in to the RNC as a user authorized to perform tracing management.

ContextTable 9-1 lists the messages to be traced.

Table 9-1 Messages to be traced

Interfaceand Protocolto Be Traced

Message Name on the LMT Message Name in Protocols

Uu

RRC_HO_FROM_UTRAN_CMD_GSM

HANDOVER FROM UTRANCOMMAND

RRC_HO_FROM_UTRAN_FAIL HANDOVER FROM UTRAN FAILURE

IubNBAP_RL_DEL_REQ RADIO LINK DELETION REQUEST

NBAP_RL_DEL_RSP RADIO LINK DELETION RESPONSE

Iu

RANAP_RELOCATION_REQUIRED RELOCATION REQUIRED

RANAP_RELOCATION_COMMAND RELOCATION COMMAND

RANAP_RELOCATION_PREPARATION_FAILURE

RELOCATION PREPARATIONFAILURE

RANAP_IU_RELEASE_COMMAND IU RELEASE COMMAND

RANAP_IU_RELEASE_COMPLETE IU RELEASE COMPLETE

Procedure

Step 1 Create a Uu tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task.Figure 9-2 shows an example of Uu signaling tracing result.

Figure 9-2 Example of Uu signaling tracing result

9 Inter-RAT Handover ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

9-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 177: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Step 2 Create an Iub tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task.Figure 9-3 shows an example of Iub signaling tracing result.

Figure 9-3 Example of Iub signaling tracing result

Step 3 Create an Iu tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task.Figure 9-4 shows an example of Iu signaling tracing result.

Figure 9-4 Example of Iu signaling tracing result

----End

9.2.5 Elementary Procedures of Inter-RAT CS Handover fromWCDMA to GSM

This describes the elementary procedures of inter-RAT CS handover from WCDMA to GSMin terms of triggering conditions and signaling procedures in normal and abnormal conditions.

9.2.5.1 Relocation Preparation ProcedureThe relocation preparation procedure is performed to prepare resources for relocation of theSRNS.

9.2.5.2 Iu Release ProcedureThe Iu release procedure is performed for the CN to release an Iu connection and all the UTRANresources related only to that Iu connection.

9.2.5.3 Radio Link Deletion ProcedureThe radio link deletion procedure is performed to release resources in a NodeB for one or moreestablished radio links towards a UE.

Relocation Preparation ProcedureThe relocation preparation procedure is performed to prepare resources for relocation of theSRNS.

Triggering ConditionsThe relocation preparation procedure can be triggered in either of the following conditions:

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 9 Inter-RAT Handover Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-5

Page 178: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

l During an SRNS relocation, the SRNC sends a RELOCATION REQUIRED message.

l During an inter-RAT CS handover from WCDMA to GSM, the SRNC sends aRELOCATION REQUIRED message.

Procedure

Figure 9-5 shows the relocation preparation procedure.

Figure 9-5 Relocation preparation procedure

The procedure shown in Figure 9-5 is described as follows:

1. The SRNC sends a RELOCATION REQUIRED message to the CN. The message containscertain information such as relocation type, relocation cause, source PLMN, source LAC,source SAC, target PLMN, and target LAC.

2. The CN interacts with the target RNC or the target network system, such as the GSMsystem, to prepare relevant resources.

3. The CN sends a response message to the SRNC.l If the target RNC or the target network system prepares the relevant resources

successfully, the CN sends a RELOCATION COMMAND message when thepreparation is complete. The message contains the L3 information IE, which carries theinformation about the relevant resources allocated by the target RNC or the targetnetwork system.

l If the resources partially or totally fail to be allocated, the CN sends a RELOCATIONPREPARATION FAILURE message.

Iu Release Procedure

The Iu release procedure is performed for the CN to release an Iu connection and all the UTRANresources related only to that Iu connection.

9 Inter-RAT Handover ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

9-6 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 179: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Triggering ConditionsThe Iu release procedure can be triggered in one of the following conditions:l The transaction between the UE and the CN is complete.

l The UTRAN requests the CN to release the resources on the Iu interface by, for example,sending an IU RELEASE REQUEST message.

l The Serving Radio Network Subsystem (SRNS) is relocated.

l The SRNS relocation is canceled after a relocation resource allocation procedure iscomplete.

ProcedureFigure 9-6 shows the Iu release procedure.

Figure 9-6 Iu release procedure

The procedure shown in Figure 9-6 is described as follows:

1. The CN sends an IU RELEASE COMMAND message to the SRNC to initiate the Iu releaseprocedure. The message indicates the cause for the release of the signaling connection.

NOTE

After sending the IU RELEASE COMMAND message, the CN will not send further RANAPconnection-oriented messages on this particular connection.

2. The SRNC releases the related UTRAN resources and then sends an IU RELEASECOMPLETE message to the CN.

Radio Link Deletion ProcedureThe radio link deletion procedure is performed to release resources in a NodeB for one or moreestablished radio links towards a UE.

Triggering ConditionsThe CRNC sends a RADIO LINK DELETION REQUEST message.

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 9 Inter-RAT Handover Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-7

Page 180: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

ProcedureFigure 9-7 shows the radio link deletion procedure.

Figure 9-7 Radio link deletion procedure

The procedure shown in Figure 9-7 is described as follows:

1. The CRNC sends a RADIO LINK DELETION REQUEST message to the NodeB. Afterreceiving the message, the NodeB deletes the radio links specified by the message.

2. The NodeB sends a response message to the CRNC.l If all the radio links are deleted, the NodeB sends a RADIO LINK DELETION

RESPONSE message.l If any radio link fails to be deleted, the NodeB sends a RADIO LINK DELETION

RESPONSE message. The Criticality Diagnostics field in the message indicates thefailure cause.

9.3 Inter-RAT CS Handover from GSM to WCDMAThe procedure of inter-RAT CS handover from GSM to WCDMA is performed to hand overthe CS services of a UE from the GSM system to the WCDMA system.

9.3.1 Protocols Related to Inter-RAT CS Handover from GSM to WCDMAThe procedure of inter-RAT CS handover from GSM to WCDMA complies with some 3GPPTS25 protocols.

9.3.2 Triggering Conditions of Inter-RAT CS Handover from GSM to WCDMAThe signal quality of the GSM cell that the UE camps on is dissatisfactory or the load of theserving cell is heavy.

9.3.3 Signaling Procedure of a Successful Inter-RAT CS Handover from GSM to WCDMAThis describes the signaling procedure of a successful inter-RAT CS handover from GSM toWCDMA. For the messages related to handover failures, refer to the elementary procedures.

9.3.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Procedure of Inter-RAT CS Handover from GSM toWCDMA

9 Inter-RAT Handover ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

9-8 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 181: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

The signaling tracing function of the RNC LMT can be used to trace the signaling procedure ofan inter-RAT CS handover from GSM to WCDMA.

9.3.5 Elementary Procedures of Inter-RAT CS Handover from GSM to WCDMAThis describes the elementary procedures of inter-RAT CS handover from GSM to WCDMAin terms of triggering conditions and signaling procedures in normal and abnormal conditions.

9.3.1 Protocols Related to Inter-RAT CS Handover from GSM toWCDMA

The procedure of inter-RAT CS handover from GSM to WCDMA complies with some 3GPPTS25 protocols.

The compliance protocols are as follows:l 3GPP TS25.331 "Radio Resource Control (RRC)"

l 3GPP TS25.413 "UTRAN Iu interface RANAP signalling"

l 3GPP TS25.433 "UTRAN Iub interface Node B Application Part (NBAP) signalling"

9.3.2 Triggering Conditions of Inter-RAT CS Handover from GSMto WCDMA

The signal quality of the GSM cell that the UE camps on is dissatisfactory or the load of theserving cell is heavy.

In such a condition, if the signal quality of a neighboring WCDMA cell is satisfactory and itsload is relatively light, the UE will be handed over from the GSM cell to the WCDMA cell.

9.3.3 Signaling Procedure of a Successful Inter-RAT CS Handoverfrom GSM to WCDMA

This describes the signaling procedure of a successful inter-RAT CS handover from GSM toWCDMA. For the messages related to handover failures, refer to the elementary procedures.

Figure 9-8 shows the signaling procedure of a successful inter-RAT CS handover from GSMto WCDMA.

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 9 Inter-RAT Handover Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-9

Page 182: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Figure 9-8 Signaling procedure of a successful inter-RAT CS handover from GSM to WCDMA

Note the following information about the procedure shown in Figure 9-8:l This figure presents only a brief of the signaling between the MSC server and the MSC

(GSM) and that between the MSC (GSM) and the BSC (GSM).l After receiving a RADIO LINK RESTORE INDICATION message, the RNC sends a

RELOCATION DETECT message to the MSC server to inform the MSC server that theUE has been handed over from GSM to WCDMA.

l After the UE is handed over, it sends a HANDOVER TO UTRAN COMPLETE messageto the RNC. If the handover fails, the UE reports the failure to the GSM system.

l After receiving a HANDOVER TO UTRAN COMPLETE message, the RNC sends aRELOCATION COMPLETE message to the MSC server. In addition, the RNC controlsthe UE to perform the UTRAN mobility information procedure, the UE capability enquiryprocedure, and the security mode control procedure.

l In practice, the signaling messages traced may differ from the signaling message shown inthe figure in terms of the sequence.

9 Inter-RAT Handover ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

9-10 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 183: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

9.3.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Procedure of Inter-RAT CSHandover from GSM to WCDMA

The signaling tracing function of the RNC LMT can be used to trace the signaling procedure ofan inter-RAT CS handover from GSM to WCDMA.

Prerequisitel The RNC LMT works properly.

l You are logged in to the RNC as a user authorized to perform tracing management.

Context

Table 9-2 lists the messages to be traced.

Table 9-2 Messages to be traced

Interfaceand Protocolto Be Traced

Message Name on the LMT Message Name in Protocols

Uu

RRC_HO_UTRAN_CMP HANDOVER TO UTRAN COMPLETE

RRC_UTRAN_MOBIL_INFO UTRAN MOBILITY INFORMATION

RRC_UTRAN_MOBIL_INFO_CONFIRM

UTRAN MOBILITY INFORMATIONCONFIRM

RRC_UTRAN_MOBIL_INFO_FAILURE

UTRAN MOBILITY INFORMATIONFAILURE

RRC_UE_CAP_ENQUIRY UE CAPABILITY ENQUIRY

RRC_UE_CAP_INFO UE CAPABILITY INFORMATION

RRC_UE_CAP_INFO_CONFIRM

UE CAPABILITY INFORMATIONCONFIRM

RRC_SECURITY_MODE_CMD SECURITY MODE COMMAND

RRC_SECURITY_MODE_CMP SECURITY MODE COMPLETE

RRC_SECURITY_MODE_FAIL SECURITY MODE FAILURE

Iub

NBAP_RL_SETUP_REQ RADIO LINK SETUP REQUEST

NBAP_RL_SETUP_RSP RADIO LINK SETUP RESPONSE

RNSAP_RL_SETUP_FAIL RADIO LINK SETUP FAILURE

NBAP_RL_RESTORE_IND RADIO LINK RESTORE INDICATION

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 9 Inter-RAT Handover Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-11

Page 184: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Interfaceand Protocolto Be Traced

Message Name on the LMT Message Name in Protocols

Iu

RANAP_RELOCATION_REQ RELOCATION REQUEST

RANAP_RELOCATION_REQ_ACK

RELOCATION REQUESTACKNOWLEDGE

RANAP_RELOCATION_FAILURE RELOCATION FAILURE

RANAP_RELOCATION_DETECT RELOCATION DECTECT

RANAP_RELOCATION_COMPLETE RELOCATION COMPLETE

ProcedureStep 1 Create a Uu tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task.

Figure 9-9 shows an example of Uu signaling tracing result.

Figure 9-9 Example of Uu signaling tracing result

Step 2 Create an Iub tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task.Figure 9-10 shows an example of Iub signaling tracing result.

Figure 9-10 Example of Iub signaling tracing result

Step 3 Create an Iu tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task.Figure 9-11 shows an example of Iu signaling tracing result.

Figure 9-11 Example of Iu signaling tracing result

9 Inter-RAT Handover ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

9-12 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 185: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

----End

9.3.5 Elementary Procedures of Inter-RAT CS Handover from GSMto WCDMA

This describes the elementary procedures of inter-RAT CS handover from GSM to WCDMAin terms of triggering conditions and signaling procedures in normal and abnormal conditions.

9.3.5.1 Relocation Resource Allocation ProcedureThe relocation resource allocation procedure is performed to allocate resources from the targetRNS for an SRNS relocation.

9.3.5.2 Radio Link Setup Procedure (Intra-RNC Handover or GSM to WCDMA CS Handover)The radio link setup procedure (intra-RNC handover or GSM to WCDMA CS handover) isperformed to set up a radio link in an SRNC-controlled NodeB for a UE.

9.3.5.3 Radio Link Restoration Procedure (Intra-RNC Handover or GSM to WCDMA CSHandover)The radio link restoration procedure (intra-RNC handover or GSM to WCDMA CS handover)is performed for a NodeB to notify the CRNC that the uplink synchronization of one or moreradio links is achieved or re-achieved.

9.3.5.4 UE Capability Enquiry ProcedureThe UE capability enquiry procedure is performed to request a UE to transmit its capabilityinformation related to any radio access network so that the network can perform dataconfiguration based on the UE capability.

9.3.5.5 Security Mode Control ProcedureThe security mode control procedure is performed to configure or reconfigure one or both of theciphering algorithm and the integrity protection algorithm for a UE.

9.3.5.6 UTRAN Mobility Information ProcedureThe UTRAN mobility information procedure is performed for the network to allocate a newUTRAN Radio Network Temporary Identifier (U-RNTI) or Cell Radio Network TemporaryIdentifier (C-RNTI) to a UE or to inform the UE of mobility-related information such as timervalues and CN domain–related information.

Relocation Resource Allocation Procedure

The relocation resource allocation procedure is performed to allocate resources from the targetRNS for an SRNS relocation.

Triggering Conditions

The relocation resource allocation procedure can be triggered in either of the followingconditions:

l During an SRNS relocation, the CN applies for resources from the target RNC.

l During an inter-RAT CS handover from GSM to WCDMA, the CN applies for resourcesfrom the target RNC.

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 9 Inter-RAT Handover Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-13

Page 186: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

ProcedureFigure 9-12 shows the relocation resource allocation procedure.

Figure 9-12 Relocation resource allocation procedure

The procedure shown in Figure 9-12 is described as follows:

1. The CN sends a RELOCATION REQUEST message to the target RNC. The messagecontains certain information, such as the IMSI of the UE, CN domain indicator, target cellidentifier, encryption, integrity protection, Iu signaling connection ID, handover cause, andRAB parameters.

2. The target RNC allocates radio resources for the relocation.3. The target RNC sends a response message to the CN.

l If the resources are allocated, the target RNC sends a RELOCATION REQUESTACKNOWLEDGE message. The message contains the radio resources and otherparameters allocated to the UE. The parameters include the UTRAN Radio NetworkTemporary Identifier (U-RNTI), RAB, transport layer and physical layer information,chosen encryption algorithm, and chosen integrity protection algorithm.

l If the resources partially or totally fail to be allocated or the target RNC rejects the SRNSrelocation for some reason, the target RNC sends a RELOCATION FAILURE message,indicating the failure cause.

Radio Link Setup Procedure (Intra-RNC Handover or GSM to WCDMA CSHandover)

The radio link setup procedure (intra-RNC handover or GSM to WCDMA CS handover) isperformed to set up a radio link in an SRNC-controlled NodeB for a UE.

Triggering ConditionsThe CRNC sends a RADIO LINK SETUP REQUEST message.

9 Inter-RAT Handover ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

9-14 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 187: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

ProcedureFigure 9-13 shows the radio link setup procedure (intra-RNC handover or GSM to WCDMACS handover).

Figure 9-13 Radio link setup procedure (intra-RNC handover or GSM to WCDMA CShandover)

The procedure shown in Figure 9-13 is described as follows:

1. The CRNC sends a RADIO LINK SETUP REQUEST message to the NodeB. Afterreceiving the message, the NodeB reserves the necessary resources and configures the newradio link according to the parameters given in the message.

2. The NodeB sends a response message to the CRNC.l If the radio link is set up, the NodeB saves the value of the Configuration Generation

ID IE contained in the RADIO LINK SETUP REQUEST message and sends a RADIOLINK SETUP RESPONSE message.

l If the radio link fails to be set up, the NodeB sends a RADIO LINK SETUP FAILUREmessage. The message contains the failure cause.

Radio Link Restoration Procedure (Intra-RNC Handover or GSM to WCDMA CSHandover)

The radio link restoration procedure (intra-RNC handover or GSM to WCDMA CS handover)is performed for a NodeB to notify the CRNC that the uplink synchronization of one or moreradio links is achieved or re-achieved.

Triggering ConditionsThe NodeB detects UL signals from the UE. That is, the NodeB finishes UL synchronizationwith the UE.

ProcedureFigure 9-14 shows the radio link restoration procedure (intra-RNC handover or GSM toWCDMA CS handover).

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 9 Inter-RAT Handover Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-15

Page 188: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Figure 9-14 Radio link restoration procedure (intra-RNC handover or GSM to WCDMA CShandover)

After performing UL synchronization with the UE, the NodeB sends a RADIO LINK RESTOREINDICATION message to the CRNC.

UE Capability Enquiry ProcedureThe UE capability enquiry procedure is performed to request a UE to transmit its capabilityinformation related to any radio access network so that the network can perform dataconfiguration based on the UE capability.

Triggering ConditionsThe UTRAN sends a UE CAPABILITY ENQUIRY message to acquire the UE capabilityinformation related to any radio access network.

ProcedureFigure 9-15 shows the UE capability enquiry procedure.

Figure 9-15 UE capability enquiry procedure

The procedure shown in Figure 9-15 is described as follows:

9 Inter-RAT Handover ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

9-16 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 189: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

1. The SRNC sends a UE CAPABILITY ENQUIRY message to the UE through the downlinkDCCH using AM RLC.

2. The UE sends a UE CAPABILITY INFORMATION message to the SRNC through theuplink DCCH using AM or UM RLC. The message contains the information about UEcapabilities.

3. The SRNC reads the UE capability information and then sends a UE CAPABILITYINFORMA CONFIRM message to the UE through the downlink DCCH using AM or UMRLC.

Security Mode Control Procedure

The security mode control procedure is performed to configure or reconfigure one or both of theciphering algorithm and the integrity protection algorithm for a UE.

Triggering Conditions

The ciphering algorithm or the integrity protection algorithm has changed.

Procedure

Figure 9-16 shows the security mode control procedure.

Figure 9-16 Security mode control procedure

The procedure shown in Figure 9-16 is described as follows:

1. Through a SECURITY MODE COMMAND message sent to the UE, the SRNC starts orreconfigures one or both of the ciphering and integrity protection configurations for theRBs or one CN domain and for all Signaling Radio Bearers (SRBs).

2. The UE sends a response message to the SRNC.

l If the UE completes configuring or reconfiguring the relevant parameters for one orboth of the ciphering and integrity protection algorithms, the UE sends a SECURITYMODE COMPLETE message to inform the SRNC of the completion.

l If the SECURITY MODE COMMAND message contains neither Ciphering mode infoIE nor Integrity protection mode info IE or if each of the two IEs has inconsistent

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 9 Inter-RAT Handover Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-17

Page 190: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

information, the UE sends a SECURITY MODE FAILURE message, indicating thefailure of the security mode control procedure as well as the failure cause.

UTRAN Mobility Information Procedure

The UTRAN mobility information procedure is performed for the network to allocate a newUTRAN Radio Network Temporary Identifier (U-RNTI) or Cell Radio Network TemporaryIdentifier (C-RNTI) to a UE or to inform the UE of mobility-related information such as timervalues and CN domain–related information.

Triggering Conditions

The SRNC sends a UTRAN MOBILITY INFORMATION message to the UE.

Procedure

Figure 9-17 shows the UTRAN mobility information procedure.

Figure 9-17 UTRAN mobility information procedure

The procedure shown in Figure 9-17 is described as follows:

1. The SRNC sends a UTRAN MOBILITY INFORMATION message to the UE.2. The UE starts to update the related fields according to the values of the IEs carried in the

message.3. The UE sends a response message to the SRNC.

l If the UE succeeds in conducting the operations specified by the UTRAN MOBILITYINFORMATION message, the UE sends a UTRAN MOBILITY INFORMATIONCONFIRM message.

l If the UE fails to conduct the operations specified by the UTRAN MOBILITYINFORMATION message, the UE sends a UTRAN MOBILITY INFORMATIONFAILURE message, indicating the failure cause.

9 Inter-RAT Handover ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

9-18 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 191: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

9.4 Inter-RAT PS Handover from WCDMA to GSMThe procedure of inter-RAT PS handover from WCDMA to GSM is performed to hand over thePS services of a UE from the WCDMA system to the GSM system.

9.4.1 Protocols Related to Inter-RAT PS Handover from WCDMA to GSMThe procedure of inter-RAT PS handover from WCDMA to GSM complies with some 3GPPTS25 protocols.

9.4.2 Triggering Conditions of Inter-RAT PS Handover from WCDMA to GSMThe signal quality of the WCDMA cell that the UE camps on is dissatisfactory or the load ofthe serving cell is heavy.

9.4.3 Signaling Procedure of Successful Inter-RAT PS Handover from WCDMA to GSMThis describes the signaling procedure of a successful inter-RAT PS handover from WCDMAto GSM. For the messages related to handover failures, refer to the elementary procedures.

9.4.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Procedure of Inter-RAT PS Handover from WCDMAto GSMThe signaling tracing function of the RNC LMT can be used to trace the signaling procedure ofan inter-RAT PS handover from WCDMA to GSM.

9.4.5 Elementary Procedures of Inter-RAT PS Handover from WCDMA to GSMThis describes the elementary procedures of inter-RAT PS handover from WCDMA to GSM interms of triggering conditions and signaling procedures in normal and abnormal conditions.

9.4.1 Protocols Related to Inter-RAT PS Handover from WCDMAto GSM

The procedure of inter-RAT PS handover from WCDMA to GSM complies with some 3GPPTS25 protocols.

The compliance protocols are as follows:l 3GPP TS25.331 "Radio Resource Control (RRC)"

l 3GPP TS25.413 "UTRAN Iu interface RANAP signalling"

l 3GPP TS25.433 "UTRAN Iub interface Node B Application Part (NBAP) signalling"

9.4.2 Triggering Conditions of Inter-RAT PS Handover fromWCDMA to GSM

The signal quality of the WCDMA cell that the UE camps on is dissatisfactory or the load ofthe serving cell is heavy.

l When the UE is in CELL_PCH, URA_PCH, or CELL_FACH state, the UE initiates cellreselection to perform a handover to GSM.

l When the UE is in CELL_DCH state, the UTRAN sends a CELL CHANGE ORDERmessage to the UE to perform a handover to GSM.

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 9 Inter-RAT Handover Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-19

Page 192: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

9.4.3 Signaling Procedure of Successful Inter-RAT PS Handoverfrom WCDMA to GSM

This describes the signaling procedure of a successful inter-RAT PS handover from WCDMAto GSM. For the messages related to handover failures, refer to the elementary procedures.

Figure 9-18 shows the signaling procedure of a successful inter-RAT PS handover fromWCDMA to GSM.

Figure 9-18 Signaling procedure of a successful inter-RAT PS handover from WCDMA to GSM

Note the following information about the procedure shown in Figure 9-18:l When the PS data volume is low, the UE may be in CELL_PCH, URA_PCH, or

URA_FACH state. Based on the parameters in the system information, the UE can initiatecell reselection to perform a handover to GSM. The cell reselection is initiated with anSRNS CONTEXT REQUEST message sent from the SGSN to SRNC.

l After cell reselection to a GSM cell, the NodeB sends a RADIO LINK FAILUREINDICATION message because the UE stops the transmission towards the WCDMA cell.This message, however, is unnecessary to the procedure of inter-RAT PS handover fromWCDMA to GSM.

l After the UE accesses a GSM cell, the SGSN directly sends an IU RELEASE COMMANDmessage to the SRNC, if the Packet Data Protocol (PDP) context does not need to betransferred.

l The SRNS context transfer is unnecessary to the procedure of inter-RAT PS handover fromWCDMA to GSM.

9 Inter-RAT Handover ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

9-20 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 193: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

9.4.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Procedure of Inter-RAT PSHandover from WCDMA to GSM

The signaling tracing function of the RNC LMT can be used to trace the signaling procedure ofan inter-RAT PS handover from WCDMA to GSM.

Prerequisitel The RNC LMT works properly.

l You are logged in to the RNC as a user authorized to perform tracing management.

Context

Table 9-3 lists the messages to be traced.

Table 9-3 Messages to be traced

Interfaceand Protocolto Be Traced

Message Name on the LMT Message Name in Protocols

Uu

RRC_CELL_CHANGE_ORDER_FROM_UTRAN

CELL CHANGE ORDER FROMUTRAN

RRC_CELL_CHANGE_ORDER_FROM_UTRAN_FAIL

CELL CHANGE ORDER FROMUTRAN FAILURE

Iub

NBAP_RL_FAIL_IND RADIO LINK FAILURE INDICATION

NBAP_RL_DEL_REQ RADIO LINK DELETION REQUEST

NBAP_RL_DEL_RSP RADIO LINK DELETION RESPONSE

Iu

RANAP_SRNS_CONTEXT_REQ SRNS CONTEXT REQUEST

RANAP_SRNS_CONTEXT_RESP SRNS CONTEXT RESPONSE

RANAP_SRNS_DATA_FORWARD_COMMAND SRNS DATA FORWARD COMMAND

RANAP_IU_RELEASE_COMMAND IU RELEASE COMMAND

RANAP_IU_RELEASE_COMPLETE IU RELEASE COMPLETE

Procedure

Step 1 Create a Uu tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task.Figure 9-19 shows an example of Uu signaling tracing result.

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 9 Inter-RAT Handover Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-21

Page 194: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Figure 9-19 Example of Uu signaling tracing result

Step 2 Create an Iub tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task.Figure 9-20 shows an example of Iub signaling tracing result.

Figure 9-20 Example of Iub signaling tracing result

Step 3 Create an Iu tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task.Figure 9-21 shows an example of Iu signaling tracing result.

Figure 9-21 Example of Iu signaling tracing result

----End

9.4.5 Elementary Procedures of Inter-RAT PS Handover fromWCDMA to GSM

This describes the elementary procedures of inter-RAT PS handover from WCDMA to GSM interms of triggering conditions and signaling procedures in normal and abnormal conditions.

9.4.5.1 Cell Change Order from UTRAN ProcedureThe cell change order from UTRAN procedure is performed to hand over, under the control ofthe network, a UE in CELL_DCH state to a GSM cell when the RABs established in theWCDMA system are only from the PS domain.

9.4.5.2 SRNS Context Transfer ProcedureThe SRNS context transfer procedure is performed to transfer SRNS contexts from the sourceRNC to the SGSN.

9.4.5.3 Iu Release ProcedureThe Iu release procedure is performed for the CN to release an Iu connection and all the UTRANresources related only to that Iu connection.

9.4.5.4 Radio Link Deletion ProcedureThe radio link deletion procedure is performed to release resources in a NodeB for one or moreestablished radio links towards a UE.

9 Inter-RAT Handover ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

9-22 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 195: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Cell Change Order from UTRAN Procedure

The cell change order from UTRAN procedure is performed to hand over, under the control ofthe network, a UE in CELL_DCH state to a GSM cell when the RABs established in theWCDMA system are only from the PS domain.

Triggering Conditions

The network decides to hand over the UE to the GSM system.

Procedure

Figure 9-22 shows the cell change order from UTRAN procedure.

Figure 9-22 Cell change order from UTRAN procedure

The procedure shown in Figure 9-22 is described as follows:

1. Through a CELL CHANGE ORDER FROM UTRAN message, the SRNC orders the UEto perform a cell change to the GSM system. The message contains certain IEs about thetarget cell. The IEs include BSIC, Band indicator, BCCH ARFCN, and NC mode.

2. Upon reception of the CELL CHANGE ORDER FROM UTRAN message, the UE startstimer T309 and initiates access to the GSM cell.

l If the UE accesses the GSM cell before the timer expires, the procedure ends.

l If the UE fails to access the GSM cell before the timer expires, the UE sends a CELLCHANGE ORDER FROM UTRAN FAILURE message to the SRNC.

SRNS Context Transfer Procedure

The SRNS context transfer procedure is performed to transfer SRNS contexts from the sourceRNC to the SGSN.

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 9 Inter-RAT Handover Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-23

Page 196: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Triggering ConditionsDuring the inter-RAT PS handover from WCDMA to GSM, the 2G equipment needs to get thePDP contexts of the UE from the 3G equipment.

ProcedureFigure 9-23 shows the SRNS context transfer procedure.

Figure 9-23 SRNS context transfer procedure

The procedure shown in Figure 9-23 is described as follows:

1. The SGSN sends an SRNS CONTEXT REQUEST message to the SRNC. The messageincludes the list of RABs whose contexts should be transferred.

2. The SRNC sends an SRNS CONTEXT RESPONSE message to the SGSN.l If the transfer is successful, the message contains RAB IDs that include the sequence

numbers for the downlink and uplink GTP PDUs and PDCP SDUs.l If the SRNC fails to identify the ID of the RAB whose context should be transferred to

the SGSN, the SRNS CONTEXT RESPONSE message contains a Cause IE whosevalue is "Invalid RAB ID".

Iu Release ProcedureThe Iu release procedure is performed for the CN to release an Iu connection and all the UTRANresources related only to that Iu connection.

Triggering ConditionsThe Iu release procedure can be triggered in one of the following conditions:l The transaction between the UE and the CN is complete.

9 Inter-RAT Handover ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

9-24 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 197: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

l The UTRAN requests the CN to release the resources on the Iu interface by, for example,sending an IU RELEASE REQUEST message.

l The Serving Radio Network Subsystem (SRNS) is relocated.

l The SRNS relocation is canceled after a relocation resource allocation procedure iscomplete.

ProcedureFigure 9-24 shows the Iu release procedure.

Figure 9-24 Iu release procedure

The procedure shown in Figure 9-24 is described as follows:

1. The CN sends an IU RELEASE COMMAND message to the SRNC to initiate the Iu releaseprocedure. The message indicates the cause for the release of the signaling connection.

NOTE

After sending the IU RELEASE COMMAND message, the CN will not send further RANAPconnection-oriented messages on this particular connection.

2. The SRNC releases the related UTRAN resources and then sends an IU RELEASECOMPLETE message to the CN.

Radio Link Deletion ProcedureThe radio link deletion procedure is performed to release resources in a NodeB for one or moreestablished radio links towards a UE.

Triggering ConditionsThe CRNC sends a RADIO LINK DELETION REQUEST message.

ProcedureFigure 9-25 shows the radio link deletion procedure.

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 9 Inter-RAT Handover Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-25

Page 198: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Figure 9-25 Radio link deletion procedure

The procedure shown in Figure 9-25 is described as follows:

1. The CRNC sends a RADIO LINK DELETION REQUEST message to the NodeB. Afterreceiving the message, the NodeB deletes the radio links specified by the message.

2. The NodeB sends a response message to the CRNC.l If all the radio links are deleted, the NodeB sends a RADIO LINK DELETION

RESPONSE message.l If any radio link fails to be deleted, the NodeB sends a RADIO LINK DELETION

RESPONSE message. The Criticality Diagnostics field in the message indicates thefailure cause.

9.5 Inter-RAT PS Handover from GSM to WCDMAThe procedure of inter-RAT PS handover from GSM to WCDMA is performed through cellreselection to WCDMA that is initiated by the UE.

For details, refer to 4 Location Update Procedure.

9 Inter-RAT Handover ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

9-26 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 199: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

10 SRNS Relocation Procedure

About This Chapter

The SRNS relocation procedure is performed to change control from the SRNC of a UE toanother RNC. This topic describes the SRNS relocation in terms of types, protocols, triggeringconditions, signaling procedure of a successful SRNS relocation, and signaling tracing on theRNC LMT. This topic also describes the elementary procedures in terms of functions, triggeringconditions, and signaling in normal and abnormal conditions.

10.1 Types of SRNS RelocationBased on whether the connection between the UE and the DRNC is set up during the relocation,SRNS relocation is categorized into two types: UE-not-involved relocation and UE-involvedrelocation.

10.2 Static RelocationThe static relocation procedure is performed to change control from the SRNC of a UE to theDRNC. The relocation is triggered after a radio link is added to the DRNC for the UE. An Iurinterface exists between the two RNCs involved in the relocation.

10.3 Relocation with Cell/URA UpdateThe procedure of relocation with cell/URA update is performed to change control from theSRNC of a UE to the DRNC. The relocation is triggered by a cell update or URA update whenthe UE performs cell reselection to a cell in another RNC.

10.4 Relocation with Hard HandoverThe procedure of relocation with hard handover is performed to change control from the SRNCof a UE to the DRNC. The relocation is triggered when the UE performs an inter-RNC hardhandover, which can be either an intra-frequency hard handover or an inter-frequency handover.No Iur interface exists between the two RNCs involved in the relocation.

10.5 DSCR ProcedureWhen the Iur connection is missing, the RNC cannot contact the SRNC to verify the UE. As aresult, the DSCR procedure is triggered, and the RNC sends the "RRC CONNECTIONRELEASE" message.

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 10 SRNS Relocation Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-1

Page 200: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

10.1 Types of SRNS RelocationBased on whether the connection between the UE and the DRNC is set up during the relocation,SRNS relocation is categorized into two types: UE-not-involved relocation and UE-involvedrelocation.

UE-not-involved reloaction:

l Static relocation: The relocation is triggered after a radio link is added to the DRNC for theUE

l Relocation with cell/URA update: This type of relocation is triggered when the UEperforms a cell reselection to a cell under an RNC between which and the SRNC no Iurinterface exists.

UE-involved SRNS relocation :

l Relocation with hard handover: An SRNS relocation is triggered when the UE performsan inter-RNC hard handover where no Iur interface exists between the two RNCs.

10.2 Static RelocationThe static relocation procedure is performed to change control from the SRNC of a UE to theDRNC. The relocation is triggered after a radio link is added to the DRNC for the UE. An Iurinterface exists between the two RNCs involved in the relocation.

10.2.1 Protocols Related to Static RelocationThe static relocation procedure complies with some 3GPP TS25 protocols.

10.2.2 Triggering Conditions of Static RelocationAll the radio links connected to the UE exist only in the DRNC.

10.2.3 Signaling Procedure of a Successful Static RelocationThis describes the signaling procedure of a successful static relocation. For the messages relatedto relocation failures, refer to the elementary procedures.

10.2.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Static Relocation ProcedureThe signaling tracing function of the RNC LMT can be used to trace the signaling procedure ofa static relocation.

10.2.5 Elementary Procedures of Static RelocationThis describes the elementary procedures of static relocation in terms of triggering conditionsand signaling procedures in normal and abnormal conditions.

10.2.1 Protocols Related to Static RelocationThe static relocation procedure complies with some 3GPP TS25 protocols.

The compliance protocols are as follows:

l 3GPP TS25.331 "Radio Resource Control (RRC)"

l 3GPP TS25.413 "UTRAN Iu interface RANAP signalling"

l 3GPP TS25.423 "UTRAN Iur interface RNSAP signalling"

10 SRNS Relocation ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

10-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 201: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

10.2.2 Triggering Conditions of Static RelocationAll the radio links connected to the UE exist only in the DRNC.

After a radio link is added to the DRNC for the UE, if all the radio links exist only in the DRNCbetween which and the SRNC an Iur interface is available, the SRNC initiates the static relocationprocedure.

10.2.3 Signaling Procedure of a Successful Static RelocationThis describes the signaling procedure of a successful static relocation. For the messages relatedto relocation failures, refer to the elementary procedures.

Figure 10-1 shows the signaling procedure of a successful static relocation.

Figure 10-1 Signaling procedure of a successful static relocation

If the DRNC does not obtain the information about the UE capability, the DRNC initiates a UEcapability enquiry procedure.

10.2.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Static Relocation ProcedureThe signaling tracing function of the RNC LMT can be used to trace the signaling procedure ofa static relocation.

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 10 SRNS Relocation Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-3

Page 202: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Prerequisitel The RNC LMT works properly.

l You are logged in to the RNC as a user authorized to perform tracing management.

Context

Table 10-1 and Table 10-2 list the messages to be traced.

Table 10-1 Messages to be traced on the SRNC

Interfaceand Protocolto Be Traced

Message Name on the LMT Message Name in Protocols

Iur RNSAP_RELOC_COMMIT RELOCATION COMMIT

Iu

RANAP_RELOCATION_REQUIRED RELOCATION REQUIRED

RANAP_RELOCATION_COMMAND RELOCATION COMMAND

RANAP_RELOCATION_PREPARATION_FAILURE

RELOCATION PREPARATIONFAILURE

RANAP_IU_RELEASE_COMMAND IU RELEASE COMMAND

RANAP_IU_RELEASE_COMPLETE IU RELEASE COMPLETE

Table 10-2 Messages to be traced on the DRNC

Interfaceand Protocolto Be Traced

Message Name on the LMT Message Name in Protocols

Uu

RRC_UTRAN_MOBIL_INFO UTRAN MOBILITY INFORMATION

RRC_UTRAN_MOBIL_INFO_CONFIRM

UTRAN MOBILITY INFORMATIONCONFIRM

RRC_UTRAN_MOBIL_INFO_FAILURE

UTRAN MOBILITY INFORMATIONFAILURE

RRC_UE_CAP_ENQUIRY UE CAPABILITY ENQUIRY

RRC_UE_CAP_INFO UE CAPABILITY INFORMATION

RRC_UE_CAP_INFO_CONFIRM

UE CAPABILITY INFORMATIONCONFIRM

Iur RNSAP_RELOC_COMMIT RELOCATION COMMIT

10 SRNS Relocation ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

10-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 203: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Interfaceand Protocolto Be Traced

Message Name on the LMT Message Name in Protocols

Iu

RANAP_RELOCATION_REQ RELOCATION REQUEST

RANAP_RELOCATION_REQ_ACK

RELOCATION REQUESTACKNOWLEDGE

RANAP_RELOCATION_FAILURE RELOCATION FAILURE

RANAP_RELOCATION_DETECT RELOCATION DETECT

RANAP_RELOCATION_COMPLETE RELOCATION COMPLETE

Procedure

Step 1 Create a Uu tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task.Figure 10-2 shows an example of Uu signaling tracing result.

Figure 10-2 Example of Uu signaling tracing result

Step 2 Create an Iur tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task.Figure 10-3 shows an example of Iur signaling tracing on the SRNC.

Figure 10-3 Example of Iur signaling tracing on the SRNC

Figure 10-4 shows an example of Iur signaling tracing on the DRNC.

Figure 10-4 Example of Iur signaling tracing on the DRNC

Step 3 Create an Iu tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task.Figure 10-5 shows an example of Iu signaling tracing on the SRNC.

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 10 SRNS Relocation Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-5

Page 204: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Figure 10-5 Example of Iu signaling tracing on the SRNC

Figure 10-6 shows an example of Iu signaling tracing on the DRNC.

Figure 10-6 Example of Iu signaling tracing on the DRNC

----End

10.2.5 Elementary Procedures of Static RelocationThis describes the elementary procedures of static relocation in terms of triggering conditionsand signaling procedures in normal and abnormal conditions.

10.2.5.1 Relocation Preparation ProcedureThe relocation preparation procedure is performed to prepare resources for relocation of theSRNS.

10.2.5.2 Relocation Resource Allocation ProcedureThe relocation resource allocation procedure is performed to allocate resources from the targetRNS for an SRNS relocation.

10.2.5.3 Relocation Commit Procedure (Static Relocation or Relocation with Cell/URA Update)The relocation commit procedure is performed to execute the change of control from the SRNCof a UE to the DRNC.

10.2.5.4 UTRAN Mobility Information ProcedureThe UTRAN mobility information procedure is performed for the network to allocate a newUTRAN Radio Network Temporary Identifier (U-RNTI) or Cell Radio Network TemporaryIdentifier (C-RNTI) to a UE or to inform the UE of mobility-related information such as timervalues and CN domain–related information.

10.2.5.5 UE Capability Enquiry ProcedureThe UE capability enquiry procedure is performed to request a UE to transmit its capabilityinformation related to any radio access network so that the network can perform dataconfiguration based on the UE capability.

10.2.5.6 Iu Release ProcedureThe Iu release procedure is performed for the CN to release an Iu connection and all the UTRANresources related only to that Iu connection.

10 SRNS Relocation ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

10-6 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 205: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Relocation Preparation ProcedureThe relocation preparation procedure is performed to prepare resources for relocation of theSRNS.

Triggering ConditionsThe relocation preparation procedure can be triggered in either of the following conditions:l During an SRNS relocation, the SRNC sends a RELOCATION REQUIRED message.

l During an inter-RAT CS handover from WCDMA to GSM, the SRNC sends aRELOCATION REQUIRED message.

ProcedureFigure 10-7 shows the relocation preparation procedure.

Figure 10-7 Relocation preparation procedure

The procedure shown in Figure 10-7 is described as follows:

1. The SRNC sends a RELOCATION REQUIRED message to the CN. The message containscertain information such as relocation type, relocation cause, source PLMN, source LAC,source SAC, target PLMN, and target LAC.

2. The CN interacts with the target RNC or the target network system, such as the GSMsystem, to prepare relevant resources.

3. The CN sends a response message to the SRNC.l If the target RNC or the target network system prepares the relevant resources

successfully, the CN sends a RELOCATION COMMAND message when thepreparation is complete. The message contains the L3 information IE, which carries theinformation about the relevant resources allocated by the target RNC or the targetnetwork system.

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 10 SRNS Relocation Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-7

Page 206: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

l If the resources partially or totally fail to be allocated, the CN sends a RELOCATIONPREPARATION FAILURE message.

Relocation Resource Allocation ProcedureThe relocation resource allocation procedure is performed to allocate resources from the targetRNS for an SRNS relocation.

Triggering ConditionsThe relocation resource allocation procedure can be triggered in either of the followingconditions:l During an SRNS relocation, the CN applies for resources from the target RNC.

l During an inter-RAT CS handover from GSM to WCDMA, the CN applies for resourcesfrom the target RNC.

ProcedureFigure 10-8 shows the relocation resource allocation procedure.

Figure 10-8 Relocation resource allocation procedure

The procedure shown in Figure 10-8 is described as follows:

1. The CN sends a RELOCATION REQUEST message to the target RNC. The messagecontains certain information, such as the IMSI of the UE, CN domain indicator, target cellidentifier, encryption, integrity protection, Iu signaling connection ID, handover cause, andRAB parameters.

2. The target RNC allocates radio resources for the relocation.3. The target RNC sends a response message to the CN.

l If the resources are allocated, the target RNC sends a RELOCATION REQUESTACKNOWLEDGE message. The message contains the radio resources and other

10 SRNS Relocation ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

10-8 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 207: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

parameters allocated to the UE. The parameters include the UTRAN Radio NetworkTemporary Identifier (U-RNTI), RAB, transport layer and physical layer information,chosen encryption algorithm, and chosen integrity protection algorithm.

l If the resources partially or totally fail to be allocated or the target RNC rejects the SRNSrelocation for some reason, the target RNC sends a RELOCATION FAILURE message,indicating the failure cause.

Relocation Commit Procedure (Static Relocation or Relocation with Cell/URAUpdate)

The relocation commit procedure is performed to execute the change of control from the SRNCof a UE to the DRNC.

Triggering Conditions

The CN sends a RELOCATION COMMAND message to the SRNC.

Procedure

Figure 10-9 shows the relocation commit procedure for the static relocation or relocation withcell/URA update.

Figure 10-9 Relocation commit procedure (static relocation or relocation with cell/URA update)

The procedure shown in Figure 10-9 is described as follows:

1. The SRNC sends a RELOCATION COMMIT message to the DRNC. If an RAB supportinglossless SRNS relocation is available on the Iu-PS interface, the RELOCATION COMMITmessage carries the GTP-U and PDCP sequence numbers required for data forwarding.Then, the SRNC initiates data forwarding.

2. The DRNC sends a RELOCATION DETECT message to the CN to notify the CN of thedetection of the relocation commitment.

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 10 SRNS Relocation Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-9

Page 208: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

3. The original DRNC sends a RELOCATION COMPLETE message to the CN to notify thatthe relocation is successful.

UTRAN Mobility Information Procedure

The UTRAN mobility information procedure is performed for the network to allocate a newUTRAN Radio Network Temporary Identifier (U-RNTI) or Cell Radio Network TemporaryIdentifier (C-RNTI) to a UE or to inform the UE of mobility-related information such as timervalues and CN domain–related information.

Triggering Conditions

The SRNC sends a UTRAN MOBILITY INFORMATION message to the UE.

Procedure

Figure 10-10 shows the UTRAN mobility information procedure.

Figure 10-10 UTRAN mobility information procedure

The procedure shown in Figure 10-10 is described as follows:

1. The SRNC sends a UTRAN MOBILITY INFORMATION message to the UE.2. The UE starts to update the related fields according to the values of the IEs carried in the

message.3. The UE sends a response message to the SRNC.

l If the UE succeeds in conducting the operations specified by the UTRAN MOBILITYINFORMATION message, the UE sends a UTRAN MOBILITY INFORMATIONCONFIRM message.

l If the UE fails to conduct the operations specified by the UTRAN MOBILITYINFORMATION message, the UE sends a UTRAN MOBILITY INFORMATIONFAILURE message, indicating the failure cause.

10 SRNS Relocation ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

10-10 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 209: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

UE Capability Enquiry ProcedureThe UE capability enquiry procedure is performed to request a UE to transmit its capabilityinformation related to any radio access network so that the network can perform dataconfiguration based on the UE capability.

Triggering ConditionsThe UTRAN sends a UE CAPABILITY ENQUIRY message to acquire the UE capabilityinformation related to any radio access network.

ProcedureFigure 10-11 shows the UE capability enquiry procedure.

Figure 10-11 UE capability enquiry procedure

The procedure shown in Figure 10-11 is described as follows:

1. The SRNC sends a UE CAPABILITY ENQUIRY message to the UE through the downlinkDCCH using AM RLC.

2. The UE sends a UE CAPABILITY INFORMATION message to the SRNC through theuplink DCCH using AM or UM RLC. The message contains the information about UEcapabilities.

3. The SRNC reads the UE capability information and then sends a UE CAPABILITYINFORMA CONFIRM message to the UE through the downlink DCCH using AM or UMRLC.

Iu Release ProcedureThe Iu release procedure is performed for the CN to release an Iu connection and all the UTRANresources related only to that Iu connection.

Triggering ConditionsThe Iu release procedure can be triggered in one of the following conditions:

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 10 SRNS Relocation Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-11

Page 210: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

l The transaction between the UE and the CN is complete.

l The UTRAN requests the CN to release the resources on the Iu interface by, for example,sending an IU RELEASE REQUEST message.

l The Serving Radio Network Subsystem (SRNS) is relocated.

l The SRNS relocation is canceled after a relocation resource allocation procedure iscomplete.

ProcedureFigure 10-12 shows the Iu release procedure.

Figure 10-12 Iu release procedure

The procedure shown in Figure 10-12 is described as follows:

1. The CN sends an IU RELEASE COMMAND message to the SRNC to initiate the Iu releaseprocedure. The message indicates the cause for the release of the signaling connection.

NOTE

After sending the IU RELEASE COMMAND message, the CN will not send further RANAPconnection-oriented messages on this particular connection.

2. The SRNC releases the related UTRAN resources and then sends an IU RELEASECOMPLETE message to the CN.

10.3 Relocation with Cell/URA UpdateThe procedure of relocation with cell/URA update is performed to change control from theSRNC of a UE to the DRNC. The relocation is triggered by a cell update or URA update whenthe UE performs cell reselection to a cell in another RNC.

10.3.1 Protocols Related to Relocation with Cell/URA UpdateThe procedure of relocation with cell/URA update complies with some 3GPP TS25 protocols.

10.3.2 Triggering Conditions of Relocation with Cell/URA Update

10 SRNS Relocation ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

10-12 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 211: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

When the UE performs cell reselection to a cell in another RNC, a CCH cannot be set up on theIur interface or the attempt to set up a CCH on the Iur interface fails.

10.3.3 Signaling Procedure of a Successful Relocation with Cell/URA UpdateThis describes the signaling procedure of a successful relocation with cell/URA update. For themessages related to relocation failures, refer to the elementary procedures.

10.3.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Procedure of Relocation with Cell/URA UpdateThe signaling tracing function of the RNC LMT can be used to trace the signaling procedure ofa relocation with cell/URA update.

10.3.5 Elementary Procedures of Relocation with Cell/URA UpdateThis describes the elementary procedures of relocation with cell/URA update in terms oftriggering conditions and signaling procedures in normal and abnormal conditions.

10.3.1 Protocols Related to Relocation with Cell/URA UpdateThe procedure of relocation with cell/URA update complies with some 3GPP TS25 protocols.

The compliance protocols are as follows:l 3GPP TS25.331 "Radio Resource Control (RRC)"

l 3GPP TS25.413 "UTRAN Iu interface RANAP signalling"

l 3GPP TS25.423 "UTRAN Iur interface RNSAP signalling"

10.3.2 Triggering Conditions of Relocation with Cell/URA UpdateWhen the UE performs cell reselection to a cell in another RNC, a CCH cannot be set up on theIur interface or the attempt to set up a CCH on the Iur interface fails.

10.3.3 Signaling Procedure of a Successful Relocation with Cell/URA Update

This describes the signaling procedure of a successful relocation with cell/URA update. For themessages related to relocation failures, refer to the elementary procedures.

Figure 10-13 shows the signaling procedure of a successful relocation with cell/URA update.

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 10 SRNS Relocation Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-13

Page 212: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Figure 10-13 Signaling procedure of a successful relocation with cell/URA update

Note the following information about the procedure shown in Figure 10-13:

l The DRNC acquires the SRNC ID of the UE from the URNTI IE in the CELL UPDATEmessage and then sends an UPLINK SIGNALLING TRANSFER INDICATION messageto the SRNC to indicate that the UE requests a cell update.

l To initiate a cell update, the UE sends a CELL UPDATE message to the DRNC. To initiatea URA update, the UE sends a URA UPDATE message to the DRNC.

l After a successful cell update, the DRNC sends a CELL UPDATE CONFIRM message tothe UE. After a successful URA update, the DRNC sends a URA UPDATE CONFIRMmessage to the UE.

l After receiving the CELL UPDATE CONFIRM or URA UPDATE CONFIRM messagefrom the DRNC, the UE can send a PHYSICAL CHANNEL RECONFIGURATIONCOMPLETE message (for the cell update) or a UTRAN MOBILITY INFORMATIONCONFIRM message (for the URA update) to the DRNC. This response from the UE isoptional.

10 SRNS Relocation ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

10-14 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 213: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

l If the DRNC does not obtain the information about the UE capability, the DRNC initiatesa UE capability enquiry procedure.

10.3.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Procedure of Relocationwith Cell/URA Update

The signaling tracing function of the RNC LMT can be used to trace the signaling procedure ofa relocation with cell/URA update.

Prerequisitel The RNC LMT works properly.

l You are logged in to the RNC as a user authorized to perform tracing management.

ContextTable 10-3 and Table 10-4 list the messages to be traced.

Table 10-3 Messages to be traced on the SRNC

InterfaceandProtocol toBe Traced

Message Name on the LMT Message Name in Protocols

IurRNSAP_UL_SIG_TRANSF_IND

UPLINK SIGNALLING TRANSFERINDICATION

RNSAP_RELOC_COMMIT RELOCATION COMMIT

Iu

RANAP_RELOCATION_REQUIRED RELOCATION REQUIRED

RANAP_RELOCATION_COMMAND RELOCATION COMMAND

RANAP_RELOCATION_PREPARATION_FAILURE

RELOCATION PREPARATIONFAILURE

RANAP_IU_RELEASE_COMMAND IU RELEASE COMMAND

RANAP_IU_RELEASE_COMPLETE IU RELEASE COMPLETE

Table 10-4 Messages to be traced on the DRNC

Interfaceand Protocolto Be Traced

Message Name on the LMT Message Name in Protocols

UuRRC_CELL_UPDATE CELL UPDATE

RRC_URA_UPDATE URA UPDATE

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 10 SRNS Relocation Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-15

Page 214: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Interfaceand Protocolto Be Traced

Message Name on the LMT Message Name in Protocols

RRC_CELL_UPDATE_CONFIRM CELL UPDATE CONFIRM

RRC_URA_UPDATE_CONFIRM URA UPDATE CONFIRM

RRC_PH_CH_RECFG_CMP PHYSICAL CHANNELRECONFIGURATION COMPLETE

RRC_UTRAN_MOBIL_INFO_CONFIRM

UTRAN MOBILITY INFORMATIONCONFIRM

RRC_UE_CAP_ENQUIRY UE CAPABILITY ENQUIRY

RRC_UE_CAP_INFO UE CAPABILITY INFORMATION

RRC_UE_CAP_INFO_CONFIRM

UE CAPABILITY INFORMATIONCONFIRM

IurRNSAP_UL_SIG_TRANSF_IND

UPLINK SIGNALLING TRANSFERINDICATION

RNSAP_RELOC_COMMIT RELOCATION COMMIT

Iu

RANAP_RELOCATION_REQ RELOCATION REQUEST

RANAP_RELOCATION_REQ_ACK

RELOCATION REQUESTACKNOWLEDGE

RANAP_RELOCATION_FAILURE RELOCATION FAILURE

RANAP_RELOCATION_DETECT RELOCATION DETECT

RANAP_RELOCATION_COMPLETE RELOCATION COMPLETE

Procedure

Step 1 Create a Uu tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task.Figure 10-14 shows an example of Uu signaling tracing for the relocation with cell update.

Figure 10-14 Example of Uu signaling tracing for the relocation with cell update

10 SRNS Relocation ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

10-16 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 215: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Step 2 Create an Iur tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task.Figure 10-15 shows an example of Iur signaling tracing on the SRNC.

Figure 10-15 Example of Iur signaling tracing on the SRNC

Figure 10-16 shows an example of Iur signaling tracing on the DRNC.

Figure 10-16 Example of Iur signaling tracing on the DRNC

Step 3 Create an Iu tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task.Figure 10-17 shows an example of Iu signaling tracing on the SRNC.

Figure 10-17 Example of Iu signaling tracing on the SRNC

Figure 10-18 shows an example of Iu signaling tracing on the DRNC.

Figure 10-18 Example of Iu signaling tracing on the DRNC

----End

10.3.5 Elementary Procedures of Relocation with Cell/URA UpdateThis describes the elementary procedures of relocation with cell/URA update in terms oftriggering conditions and signaling procedures in normal and abnormal conditions.

10.3.5.1 Relocation Preparation ProcedureThe relocation preparation procedure is performed to prepare resources for relocation of theSRNS.

10.3.5.2 Relocation Resource Allocation Procedure

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 10 SRNS Relocation Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-17

Page 216: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

The relocation resource allocation procedure is performed to allocate resources from the targetRNS for an SRNS relocation.

10.3.5.3 Cell Update ProcedureThe cell update procedure is performed to update the UE-related information on the UTRANside when the location of a UE changes. In addition, the cell update procedure takes the role ofmonitoring the RRC connection, switching the status of the RRC connection, reporting errors,and transferring information.

10.3.5.4 URA Update ProcedureThe URA update procedure is performed to update the URA-related location information on thenetwork side when the location of a UE changes.

10.3.5.5 Relocation Commit Procedure (Static Relocation or Relocation with Cell/URA Update)The relocation commit procedure is performed to execute the change of control from the SRNCof a UE to the DRNC.

10.3.5.6 UE Capability Enquiry ProcedureThe UE capability enquiry procedure is performed to request a UE to transmit its capabilityinformation related to any radio access network so that the network can perform dataconfiguration based on the UE capability.

10.3.5.7 Iu Release ProcedureThe Iu release procedure is performed for the CN to release an Iu connection and all the UTRANresources related only to that Iu connection.

Relocation Preparation ProcedureThe relocation preparation procedure is performed to prepare resources for relocation of theSRNS.

Triggering ConditionsThe relocation preparation procedure can be triggered in either of the following conditions:l During an SRNS relocation, the SRNC sends a RELOCATION REQUIRED message.

l During an inter-RAT CS handover from WCDMA to GSM, the SRNC sends aRELOCATION REQUIRED message.

ProcedureFigure 10-19 shows the relocation preparation procedure.

10 SRNS Relocation ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

10-18 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 217: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Figure 10-19 Relocation preparation procedure

The procedure shown in Figure 10-19 is described as follows:

1. The SRNC sends a RELOCATION REQUIRED message to the CN. The message containscertain information such as relocation type, relocation cause, source PLMN, source LAC,source SAC, target PLMN, and target LAC.

2. The CN interacts with the target RNC or the target network system, such as the GSMsystem, to prepare relevant resources.

3. The CN sends a response message to the SRNC.l If the target RNC or the target network system prepares the relevant resources

successfully, the CN sends a RELOCATION COMMAND message when thepreparation is complete. The message contains the L3 information IE, which carries theinformation about the relevant resources allocated by the target RNC or the targetnetwork system.

l If the resources partially or totally fail to be allocated, the CN sends a RELOCATIONPREPARATION FAILURE message.

Relocation Resource Allocation Procedure

The relocation resource allocation procedure is performed to allocate resources from the targetRNS for an SRNS relocation.

Triggering Conditions

The relocation resource allocation procedure can be triggered in either of the followingconditions:l During an SRNS relocation, the CN applies for resources from the target RNC.

l During an inter-RAT CS handover from GSM to WCDMA, the CN applies for resourcesfrom the target RNC.

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 10 SRNS Relocation Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-19

Page 218: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Procedure

Figure 10-20 shows the relocation resource allocation procedure.

Figure 10-20 Relocation resource allocation procedure

The procedure shown in Figure 10-20 is described as follows:

1. The CN sends a RELOCATION REQUEST message to the target RNC. The messagecontains certain information, such as the IMSI of the UE, CN domain indicator, target cellidentifier, encryption, integrity protection, Iu signaling connection ID, handover cause, andRAB parameters.

2. The target RNC allocates radio resources for the relocation.

3. The target RNC sends a response message to the CN.

l If the resources are allocated, the target RNC sends a RELOCATION REQUESTACKNOWLEDGE message. The message contains the radio resources and otherparameters allocated to the UE. The parameters include the UTRAN Radio NetworkTemporary Identifier (U-RNTI), RAB, transport layer and physical layer information,chosen encryption algorithm, and chosen integrity protection algorithm.

l If the resources partially or totally fail to be allocated or the target RNC rejects the SRNSrelocation for some reason, the target RNC sends a RELOCATION FAILURE message,indicating the failure cause.

Cell Update Procedure

The cell update procedure is performed to update the UE-related information on the UTRANside when the location of a UE changes. In addition, the cell update procedure takes the role ofmonitoring the RRC connection, switching the status of the RRC connection, reporting errors,and transferring information.

10 SRNS Relocation ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

10-20 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 219: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Triggering ConditionsThe cell update procedure can be triggered in one of the following conditions:l Cell reselection

l Re-entering the service area

l Periodical cell update

l Radio link failure

l Paging response

l Uplink data transmission

l RLC unrecoverable error

ProcedureFigure 10-21 shows the cell update procedure.

Figure 10-21 Cell update procedure

The procedure shown in Figure 10-21 is described as follows:

1. The UE sends a CELL UPDATE message to the RNC. The message contains theinformation such as the Serving RNC Radio Network Temporary Identifier (S-RNTI) andthe SRNC ID.

2. The RNC sends a CELL UPDATE CONFIRM message to the UE. The message containsthe information such as the U-RNTI and the IEs about the transport channels, physicalchannels, and radio bearers.

3. According to related IEs in the received message, the UE may respond with messages ornot. If the UE responds, the message can be one of the following messages:l UTRAN MOBILITY INFORMATION CONFIRM

l PHYSICAL CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION COMPLETE

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 10 SRNS Relocation Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-21

Page 220: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

l TRANSPORT CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION COMPLETE

l RADIO BEARER RECONFIGURATION COMPLETE

l RADIO BEARER RELEASE COMPLETE

URA Update Procedure

The URA update procedure is performed to update the URA-related location information on thenetwork side when the location of a UE changes.

Triggering Conditions

The URA update procedure can be triggered in either of the following conditions:

l URA reselection

l Periodical URA update

Procedure

Figure 10-22 shows the URA update procedure.

Figure 10-22 URA update procedure

The procedure shown in Figure 10-22 is described as follows:

1. The UE sends a URA UPDATE message to the RNC to initiate the URA update. Themessage contains the cause for the URA update and the IEs such as the U-RNTI.

2. The RNC sends a URA UPDATE CONFIRM message to the UE. The message containsthe new C-RNTI and U-RNTI or the information about the new ciphering and integrityprotection modes.

3. The UE responds optionally. If there is a response, the UE sends a UTRAN MOBILITYINFORMATION CONFIRM message to the RNC after taking the new parameters intoeffect.

10 SRNS Relocation ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

10-22 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 221: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Relocation Commit Procedure (Static Relocation or Relocation with Cell/URAUpdate)

The relocation commit procedure is performed to execute the change of control from the SRNCof a UE to the DRNC.

Triggering ConditionsThe CN sends a RELOCATION COMMAND message to the SRNC.

ProcedureFigure 10-23 shows the relocation commit procedure for the static relocation or relocation withcell/URA update.

Figure 10-23 Relocation commit procedure (static relocation or relocation with cell/URAupdate)

The procedure shown in Figure 10-23 is described as follows:

1. The SRNC sends a RELOCATION COMMIT message to the DRNC. If an RAB supportinglossless SRNS relocation is available on the Iu-PS interface, the RELOCATION COMMITmessage carries the GTP-U and PDCP sequence numbers required for data forwarding.Then, the SRNC initiates data forwarding.

2. The DRNC sends a RELOCATION DETECT message to the CN to notify the CN of thedetection of the relocation commitment.

3. The original DRNC sends a RELOCATION COMPLETE message to the CN to notify thatthe relocation is successful.

UE Capability Enquiry ProcedureThe UE capability enquiry procedure is performed to request a UE to transmit its capabilityinformation related to any radio access network so that the network can perform dataconfiguration based on the UE capability.

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 10 SRNS Relocation Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-23

Page 222: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Triggering ConditionsThe UTRAN sends a UE CAPABILITY ENQUIRY message to acquire the UE capabilityinformation related to any radio access network.

ProcedureFigure 10-24 shows the UE capability enquiry procedure.

Figure 10-24 UE capability enquiry procedure

The procedure shown in Figure 10-24 is described as follows:

1. The SRNC sends a UE CAPABILITY ENQUIRY message to the UE through the downlinkDCCH using AM RLC.

2. The UE sends a UE CAPABILITY INFORMATION message to the SRNC through theuplink DCCH using AM or UM RLC. The message contains the information about UEcapabilities.

3. The SRNC reads the UE capability information and then sends a UE CAPABILITYINFORMA CONFIRM message to the UE through the downlink DCCH using AM or UMRLC.

Iu Release ProcedureThe Iu release procedure is performed for the CN to release an Iu connection and all the UTRANresources related only to that Iu connection.

Triggering ConditionsThe Iu release procedure can be triggered in one of the following conditions:l The transaction between the UE and the CN is complete.

l The UTRAN requests the CN to release the resources on the Iu interface by, for example,sending an IU RELEASE REQUEST message.

l The Serving Radio Network Subsystem (SRNS) is relocated.

10 SRNS Relocation ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

10-24 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 223: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

l The SRNS relocation is canceled after a relocation resource allocation procedure iscomplete.

ProcedureFigure 10-25 shows the Iu release procedure.

Figure 10-25 Iu release procedure

The procedure shown in Figure 10-25 is described as follows:

1. The CN sends an IU RELEASE COMMAND message to the SRNC to initiate the Iu releaseprocedure. The message indicates the cause for the release of the signaling connection.

NOTE

After sending the IU RELEASE COMMAND message, the CN will not send further RANAPconnection-oriented messages on this particular connection.

2. The SRNC releases the related UTRAN resources and then sends an IU RELEASECOMPLETE message to the CN.

10.4 Relocation with Hard HandoverThe procedure of relocation with hard handover is performed to change control from the SRNCof a UE to the DRNC. The relocation is triggered when the UE performs an inter-RNC hardhandover, which can be either an intra-frequency hard handover or an inter-frequency handover.No Iur interface exists between the two RNCs involved in the relocation.

10.4.1 Protocols Related to Relocation with Hard HandoverThe procedure of relocation with hard handover complies with some 3GPP TS25 protocols.

10.4.2 Triggering Conditions of Relocation with Hard HandoverThe UE in CELL_DCH state performs an inter-RNC hard handover, which can be either anintra-frequency hard handover or an inter-frequency handover.

10.4.3 Signaling Procedure of a Successful Relocation with Hard HandoverThis describes the signaling procedure of a successful relocation with hard handover. For themessages related to relocation failures, refer to the elementary procedures.

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 10 SRNS Relocation Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-25

Page 224: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

10.4.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Procedure of Relocation with Hard HandoverThe signaling tracing function of the RNC LMT can be used to trace the signaling procedure ofa relocation with hard handover.

10.4.5 Elementary Procedures of Relocation with Hard HandoverThis describes the elementary procedures of relocation with hard handover in terms of triggeringconditions and signaling procedures in normal and abnormal conditions.

10.4.1 Protocols Related to Relocation with Hard HandoverThe procedure of relocation with hard handover complies with some 3GPP TS25 protocols.

The compliance protocols are as follows:l 3GPP TS25.331 "Radio Resource Control (RRC)"

l 3GPP TS25.413 "UTRAN Iu interface RANAP signalling"

10.4.2 Triggering Conditions of Relocation with Hard HandoverThe UE in CELL_DCH state performs an inter-RNC hard handover, which can be either anintra-frequency hard handover or an inter-frequency handover.

In such a condition, if no Iur interface exists between the two RNCs, the SRNC performs arelocation with hard handover.

10.4.3 Signaling Procedure of a Successful Relocation with HardHandover

This describes the signaling procedure of a successful relocation with hard handover. For themessages related to relocation failures, refer to the elementary procedures.

Figure 10-26 shows the signaling procedure of a successful relocation with hard handover.

10 SRNS Relocation ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

10-26 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 225: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Figure 10-26 Signaling procedure of a successful relocation with hard handover

Note the following information about the procedure shown in Figure 10-26:l During the relocation with hard handover, if an RAB supporting lossless SRNS relocation

is available on the Iu-PS interface, the SRNC sends the GTP-U and PDCP sequencenumbers to the DRNC through the FORWARD SRNS CONTEXT message. The sequencenumbers are required for data forwarding.

l After receiving a RADIO LINK RESTORE INDICATION message from the NodeB, theDRNC sends a RELOCATION DETECT message to the CN.

l If the DRNC does not obtain the information about the UE capability, the DRNC initiatesa UE capability enquiry procedure.

10.4.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Procedure of Relocationwith Hard Handover

The signaling tracing function of the RNC LMT can be used to trace the signaling procedure ofa relocation with hard handover.

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 10 SRNS Relocation Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-27

Page 226: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Prerequisitel The RNC LMT works properly.

l You are logged in to the RNC as a user authorized to perform tracing management.

ContextTable 10-5 and Table 10-6 list the messages to be traced.

Table 10-5 Messages to be traced on the SRNC

Interfaceand Protocolto Be Traced

Message Name on the LMT Message Name in Protocols

UuRRC_PH_CH_RECFG PHYSICAL CHANNEL

RECONFIGURATION

RRC_PH_CH_RECFG_FAIL PHYSICAL CHANNELRECONFIGURATION FAILURE

Iu

RANAP_RELOCATION_REQUIRED RELOCATION REQUIRED

RANAP_RELOCATION_COMMAND RELOCATION COMMAND

RANAP_RELOCATION_PREPARATION_FAILURE

RELOCATION PREPARATIONFAILURE

RANAP_FORWARD_SRNS_CONTEXT FORWARD SRNS CONTEXT

RANAP_IU_RELEASE_COMMAND IU RELEASE COMMAND

RANAP_IU_RELEASE_COMPLETE IU RELEASE COMPLETE

Table 10-6 Messages to be traced on the DRNC

Interfaceand Protocolto Be Traced

Message Name on the LMT Message Name in Protocols

Uu

RRC_PH_CH_RECFG_CMP PHYSICAL CHANNELRECONFIGURATION COMPLETE

RRC_UE_CAP_ENQUIRY UE CAPABILITY ENQUIRY

RRC_UE_CAP_INFO UE CAPABILITY INFORMATION

RRC_UE_CAP_INFO_CONFIRM

UE CAPABILITY INFORMATIONCONFIRM

10 SRNS Relocation ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

10-28 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 227: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Interfaceand Protocolto Be Traced

Message Name on the LMT Message Name in Protocols

Iu

RANAP_RELOCATION_REQ RELOCATION REQUEST

RANAP_RELOCATION_REQ_ACK

RELOCATION REQUESTACKNOWLEDGE

RANAP_RELOCATION_FAILURE RELOCATION FAILURE

RANAP_FORWARD_SRNS_CONTEXT FORWARD SRNS CONTEXT

RANAP_RELOCATION_DETECT RELOCATION DETECT

RANAP_RELOCATION_COMPLETE RELOCATION COMPLETE

Procedure

Step 1 Create a Uu tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task.Figure 10-27 shows an example of Uu signaling tracing on the SRNC.

Figure 10-27 Example of Uu signaling tracing on the SRNC

Figure 10-28 shows an example of Uu signaling tracing on the DRNC.

Figure 10-28 Example of Uu signaling tracing on the DRNC

Step 2 Create an Iu tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task.Figure 10-29 shows an example of Iu signaling tracing on the SRNC.

Figure 10-29 Example of Iu signaling tracing on the SRNC

Figure 10-30 shows an example of Iu signaling tracing on the DRNC.

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 10 SRNS Relocation Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-29

Page 228: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Figure 10-30 Example of Iu signaling tracing on the DRNC

----End

10.4.5 Elementary Procedures of Relocation with Hard HandoverThis describes the elementary procedures of relocation with hard handover in terms of triggeringconditions and signaling procedures in normal and abnormal conditions.

10.4.5.1 Relocation Preparation ProcedureThe relocation preparation procedure is performed to prepare resources for relocation of theSRNS.

10.4.5.2 Relocation Resource Allocation ProcedureThe relocation resource allocation procedure is performed to allocate resources from the targetRNS for an SRNS relocation.

10.4.5.3 Relocation Commit Procedure (Relocation with Hard Handover)The relocation commit procedure is performed to execute the change of control from the SRNCof a UE to the DRNC.

10.4.5.4 Physical Channel Reconfiguration ProcedureThe physical channel reconfiguration procedure is performed to set up, reconfigure, or releasea physical channel.

10.4.5.5 UE Capability Enquiry ProcedureThe UE capability enquiry procedure is performed to request a UE to transmit its capabilityinformation related to any radio access network so that the network can perform dataconfiguration based on the UE capability.

10.4.5.6 Iu Release ProcedureThe Iu release procedure is performed for the CN to release an Iu connection and all the UTRANresources related only to that Iu connection.

Relocation Preparation ProcedureThe relocation preparation procedure is performed to prepare resources for relocation of theSRNS.

Triggering ConditionsThe relocation preparation procedure can be triggered in either of the following conditions:l During an SRNS relocation, the SRNC sends a RELOCATION REQUIRED message.

l During an inter-RAT CS handover from WCDMA to GSM, the SRNC sends aRELOCATION REQUIRED message.

ProcedureFigure 10-31 shows the relocation preparation procedure.

10 SRNS Relocation ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

10-30 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 229: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Figure 10-31 Relocation preparation procedure

The procedure shown in Figure 10-31 is described as follows:

1. The SRNC sends a RELOCATION REQUIRED message to the CN. The message containscertain information such as relocation type, relocation cause, source PLMN, source LAC,source SAC, target PLMN, and target LAC.

2. The CN interacts with the target RNC or the target network system, such as the GSMsystem, to prepare relevant resources.

3. The CN sends a response message to the SRNC.l If the target RNC or the target network system prepares the relevant resources

successfully, the CN sends a RELOCATION COMMAND message when thepreparation is complete. The message contains the L3 information IE, which carries theinformation about the relevant resources allocated by the target RNC or the targetnetwork system.

l If the resources partially or totally fail to be allocated, the CN sends a RELOCATIONPREPARATION FAILURE message.

Relocation Resource Allocation Procedure

The relocation resource allocation procedure is performed to allocate resources from the targetRNS for an SRNS relocation.

Triggering Conditions

The relocation resource allocation procedure can be triggered in either of the followingconditions:l During an SRNS relocation, the CN applies for resources from the target RNC.

l During an inter-RAT CS handover from GSM to WCDMA, the CN applies for resourcesfrom the target RNC.

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 10 SRNS Relocation Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-31

Page 230: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Procedure

Figure 10-32 shows the relocation resource allocation procedure.

Figure 10-32 Relocation resource allocation procedure

The procedure shown in Figure 10-32 is described as follows:

1. The CN sends a RELOCATION REQUEST message to the target RNC. The messagecontains certain information, such as the IMSI of the UE, CN domain indicator, target cellidentifier, encryption, integrity protection, Iu signaling connection ID, handover cause, andRAB parameters.

2. The target RNC allocates radio resources for the relocation.3. The target RNC sends a response message to the CN.

l If the resources are allocated, the target RNC sends a RELOCATION REQUESTACKNOWLEDGE message. The message contains the radio resources and otherparameters allocated to the UE. The parameters include the UTRAN Radio NetworkTemporary Identifier (U-RNTI), RAB, transport layer and physical layer information,chosen encryption algorithm, and chosen integrity protection algorithm.

l If the resources partially or totally fail to be allocated or the target RNC rejects the SRNSrelocation for some reason, the target RNC sends a RELOCATION FAILURE message,indicating the failure cause.

Relocation Commit Procedure (Relocation with Hard Handover)

The relocation commit procedure is performed to execute the change of control from the SRNCof a UE to the DRNC.

Triggering Conditions

The CN sends a RELOCATION COMMAND message to the SRNC.

10 SRNS Relocation ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

10-32 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 231: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Procedure

Figure 10-33 shows the relocation commit procedure for the relocation with hard handover.

Figure 10-33 Relocation commit procedure (relocation with hard handover)

The procedure shown in Figure 10-33 is described as follows:

1. When an RAB supporting lossless SRNS relocation is available on the Iu-PS interface, theSRNC sends a FORWARD SRNS CONTEXT message to the SGSN to ask the SGSN totransfer the GTP-U and PDCP sequence numbers to the DRNC. The sequence numbers arerequired for data forwarding.

2. After receiving the FORWARD SRNS CONTEXT message, the SGSN forwards themessage to the DRNC.

3. The UE is handed over from the SRNC to the DRNC through a physical channelreconfiguration procedure. After receiving a RADIO LINK RESTORE INDICATIONmessage from the NodeB, the DRNC sends a RELOCATION DETECT message to theCN.

4. The original DRNC sends a RELOCATION COMPLETE message to the CN to notify thatthe relocation is successful.

Physical Channel Reconfiguration Procedure

The physical channel reconfiguration procedure is performed to set up, reconfigure, or releasea physical channel.

Triggering Conditions

The SRNC sends a PHYSICAL CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION message.

Procedure

Figure 10-34 shows the physical channel reconfiguration procedure.

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 10 SRNS Relocation Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-33

Page 232: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Figure 10-34 Physical channel reconfiguration procedure

The procedure shown in Figure 10-34 is described as follows:

1. The SRNC sends a PHYSICAL CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION message to the UE torequest reconfiguration of a physical channel.

2. The UE saves the IEs of the UE, Radio Bearer (RB), transport channel, and physicalchannel.

3. The UE sends a response message to the SRNC.l If successfully reconfiguring the physical channels specified by the PHYSICAL

CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION message, the UE sends a PHYSICAL CHANNELRECONFIGURATION COMPLETE message on the uplink DCCH by using AM RLC.

l If failing to reconfigure the physical channels specified by the PHYSICAL CHANNELRECONFIGURATION message, the UE restores the configuration to the old physicalchannel configuration and sends a PHYSICAL CHANNEL RECONFIGURATIONFAILURE message on the DCCH by using AM RLC. The value of the Failure causeIE contained in the PHYSICAL CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION FAILUREmessage is "physical channel failure".

UE Capability Enquiry ProcedureThe UE capability enquiry procedure is performed to request a UE to transmit its capabilityinformation related to any radio access network so that the network can perform dataconfiguration based on the UE capability.

Triggering ConditionsThe UTRAN sends a UE CAPABILITY ENQUIRY message to acquire the UE capabilityinformation related to any radio access network.

ProcedureFigure 10-35 shows the UE capability enquiry procedure.

10 SRNS Relocation ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

10-34 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 233: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Figure 10-35 UE capability enquiry procedure

The procedure shown in Figure 10-35 is described as follows:

1. The SRNC sends a UE CAPABILITY ENQUIRY message to the UE through the downlinkDCCH using AM RLC.

2. The UE sends a UE CAPABILITY INFORMATION message to the SRNC through theuplink DCCH using AM or UM RLC. The message contains the information about UEcapabilities.

3. The SRNC reads the UE capability information and then sends a UE CAPABILITYINFORMA CONFIRM message to the UE through the downlink DCCH using AM or UMRLC.

Iu Release Procedure

The Iu release procedure is performed for the CN to release an Iu connection and all the UTRANresources related only to that Iu connection.

Triggering Conditions

The Iu release procedure can be triggered in one of the following conditions:

l The transaction between the UE and the CN is complete.

l The UTRAN requests the CN to release the resources on the Iu interface by, for example,sending an IU RELEASE REQUEST message.

l The Serving Radio Network Subsystem (SRNS) is relocated.

l The SRNS relocation is canceled after a relocation resource allocation procedure iscomplete.

Procedure

Figure 10-36 shows the Iu release procedure.

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 10 SRNS Relocation Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-35

Page 234: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Figure 10-36 Iu release procedure

The procedure shown in Figure 10-36 is described as follows:

1. The CN sends an IU RELEASE COMMAND message to the SRNC to initiate the Iu releaseprocedure. The message indicates the cause for the release of the signaling connection.

NOTE

After sending the IU RELEASE COMMAND message, the CN will not send further RANAPconnection-oriented messages on this particular connection.

2. The SRNC releases the related UTRAN resources and then sends an IU RELEASECOMPLETE message to the CN.

10.5 DSCR ProcedureWhen the Iur connection is missing, the RNC cannot contact the SRNC to verify the UE. As aresult, the DSCR procedure is triggered, and the RNC sends the "RRC CONNECTIONRELEASE" message.

10.5.1 Protocols Related to the DSCR ProcedureThe DSCR procedure complies with the following 3GPP TS25 protocols:

10.5.2 Cause of Triggering the DSCR ProcedureWhen the Iur connection is missing, the RNC cannot contact the SRNC to verify the UE. As aresult, the directed signaling connection re-establishment (DSCR) procedure is triggered, andthe RNC sends the "RRC CONNECTION RELEASE" message.

10.5.3 Successful DSCR ProcedureThis describes a successful DSCR procedure.

10.5.1 Protocols Related to the DSCR ProcedureThe DSCR procedure complies with the following 3GPP TS25 protocols:

l 3GPP TS25.331 "Radio Resource Control (RRC)"

l 3GPP TS23.060 "General Packet Radio Service (GPRS)"

10 SRNS Relocation ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

10-36 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 235: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

10.5.2 Cause of Triggering the DSCR ProcedureWhen the Iur connection is missing, the RNC cannot contact the SRNC to verify the UE. As aresult, the directed signaling connection re-establishment (DSCR) procedure is triggered, andthe RNC sends the "RRC CONNECTION RELEASE" message.

10.5.3 Successful DSCR ProcedureThis describes a successful DSCR procedure.

Figure 10-37 shows a successful DSCR procedure.

Figure 10-37 Successful DSCR procedure

The UE sets up the RRC connection to the RNC1 (namely, SRNC). During the relocation, theRNC1 is the source RNC and the RNC2 is the destination RNC.

The procedure is as follows:

1. The RNC1 initiates a DSCR procedure.

2. The RNC1 sends the "DOWNLINK SIGNALLING TRANSFER REQUEST" message tothe RNC2, requesting the RNC2 to send the "RRC CONNECTION RELEASE" messageto the UE.

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 10 SRNS Relocation Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-37

Page 236: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

3. The RNC2 sends the UE the "RRC CONNECTION RELEASE" message, which contains"DSCR", namely, the cause of the "RRC CONNECTION RELEASE" message."

4. After receiving the message, the UE releases the current RAB connection and RRCconnection and then enters the idle mode.

5. The UE performs a cell reselection procedure to find a suitable cell.6. After the UE finds a suitable cell, the UE reestablishes the RRC connection and RAB

connection immediately.7. The UE sends the RNC2 the "ROUTE AREA UPDATE" message to initiate the URA

update.8. The SGSN requests the RNC1 to transmit data packets. Then, the RNC1 transmits data

packets (except those unacknowledged by the RNC1) to the SGSN.9. The UE sends the SGSN the "DIRECT TRANSFER" message to request the service setup.10. The SGSN initiates the RAB establishment procedure.

10 SRNS Relocation ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

10-38 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 237: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

11 Location Service Procedure

About This Chapter

The location service procedure is performed to identify the geographic location of a UE. Thistopic describes the location services in terms of positioning methods, protocols, triggeringconditions, signaling procedure of successful positioning, and signaling tracing on the RNCLMT. This topic also describes the elementary procedures in terms of functions, triggeringconditions, and signaling in normal and abnormal conditions.

11.1 Positioning MethodsThree standard positioning methods are available in a WCDMA system. They are CELLID+RTT, OTDOA, and A-GPS.

11.2 Positioning Based on CELLID+RTTWhen the CELLID+RTT positioning method is adopted, the location of a UE is identified basedon the coverage area of the reference cell and the RTT measurements performed on all the cellsin the active set of the UE.

11.3 Positioning Based on OTDOA-IPDLWhen the OTDOA-IPDL positioning method is adopted, the location of a UE is identified basedon the arrival time differences of CPICH signals from three inter-NodeB cells to the UE, whichmeasures the differences.

11.4 Positioning Based on A-GPSWhen the A-GPS positioning method is adopted, the location of a UE is identified based on theGPS positioning-assistance data and GPS pseudo-range measurement results collected by theRNC.

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 11 Location Service Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-1

Page 238: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

11.1 Positioning MethodsThree standard positioning methods are available in a WCDMA system. They are CELLID+RTT, OTDOA, and A-GPS.

Typically, in terms of the horizontal accuracy, Network Assisted GPS (A-GPS) ranks first,Observed Time Difference Of Arrival (OTDOA) second and CELLID+RTT third. RTT is shortfor Round Trip Time. Exceptions, however, may exist. For example, in places where obstaclesexist in large number and not enough satellite signals are found, the A-GPS positioning methodmay fail or perform with poor accuracy. In that case, the CELLID+RTT positioning method mayprovide higher accuracy.

11.2 Positioning Based on CELLID+RTTWhen the CELLID+RTT positioning method is adopted, the location of a UE is identified basedon the coverage area of the reference cell and the RTT measurements performed on all the cellsin the active set of the UE.

11.2.1 Protocols Related to Positioning Based on CELLID+RTTThe procedure of positioning based on CELLID+RTT complies with some 3GPP TS22, TS23,and TS25 protocols.

11.2.2 Triggering Conditions of Positioning Based on CELLID+RTTThe CN initiates a positioning request and the RNC chooses the UE-assisted CELLID+RTTpositioning method.

11.2.3 Signaling Procedure of Successful Positioning Based on CELLID+RTTThis describes the signaling procedure of successful positioning based on CELLID+RTT. Forthe messages related to positioning failures, refer to the elementary procedures.

11.2.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Procedure of Positioning Based on CELLID+RTT orOTDOA-IPDLThe signaling tracing function of the RNC LMT can be used to trace the signaling procedure ofpositioning based on CELLID+RTT or OTDOA-IPDL.

11.2.5 Elementary Procedures of Positioning Based on CELLID+RTTThis describes the elementary procedures of positioning based on CELLID+RTT in terms oftriggering conditions and signaling procedures in normal and abnormal conditions.

11.2.1 Protocols Related to Positioning Based on CELLID+RTTThe procedure of positioning based on CELLID+RTT complies with some 3GPP TS22, TS23,and TS25 protocols.

The compliance protocols are as follows:l 3GPP TS22.071 "Location Services (LCS)"

l 3GPP TS23.271 "Functional stage 2 description of LCS"

l 3GPP TS25.305 "User Equipment (UE) positioning in Universal Terrestrial Radio AccessNetwork (UTRAN)"

l 3GPP TS25.331 "Radio Resource Control (RRC)"

11 Location Service ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

11-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 239: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

l 3GPP TS25.413 "UTRAN Iu interface RANAP signalling"

l 3GPP TS25.433 "UTRAN Iub interface Node B Application Part (NBAP) signaling"

11.2.2 Triggering Conditions of Positioning Based on CELLID+RTTThe CN initiates a positioning request and the RNC chooses the UE-assisted CELLID+RTTpositioning method.

After receiving the positioning request from the CN, the RNC chooses the UE-assisted CELLID+RTT positioning method based on the factors such as the QoS of positioning, the positioningmethod configured on the RNC side, and the positioning capability of the UE.

11.2.3 Signaling Procedure of Successful Positioning Based onCELLID+RTT

This describes the signaling procedure of successful positioning based on CELLID+RTT. Forthe messages related to positioning failures, refer to the elementary procedures.

Figure 11-1 shows the signaling procedure of successful positioning based on CELLID+RTT.

Figure 11-1 Signaling procedure of successful positioning based on CELLID+RTT

Note the following information about the procedure shown in Figure 11-1:l The CN sends an authenticated LOCATION REPORTING CONTROL message to the

SRNC, and the SRNC chooses the UE-assisted CELLID+RTT positioning method.l The SRNC performs location calculation based on the RTT measurement results and the

known location of each cell and then reports the positioning results to the CN through aLOCATION REPORT message.

11.2.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Procedure of PositioningBased on CELLID+RTT or OTDOA-IPDL

The signaling tracing function of the RNC LMT can be used to trace the signaling procedure ofpositioning based on CELLID+RTT or OTDOA-IPDL.

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 11 Location Service Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-3

Page 240: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Prerequisitel The RNC LMT works properly.

l You are logged in to the RNC as a user authorized to perform tracing management.

ContextTable 11-1 lists the messages to be traced.

Table 11-1 Messages to be traced

Interfaceand Protocolto Be Traced

Message Name on the LMT Message Name in Protocols

Uu

RRC_MEAS_CTRL MEASUREMENT CONTROL

RRC_MEAS_RPRT MEASUREMENT REPORT

RRC_MEAS_CTRL_FAIL MEASUREMENT CONTROLFAILURE

Iub

NBAP_DECIC_MEAS_INIT_REQ

DEDICATED MEASUREMENTINITIALIZATION REQUEST

NBAP_DECIC_MEAS_INIT_RSP

DEDICATED MEASUREMENTINITIALIZATION REPONSE

Iu

RANAP_LOCATION_REPORTING_CONTROL LOCATION REPORTING CONTROL

RANAP_LOCATION_REPORT LOCATION REPORT

ProcedureCreate a Call Data Tracing (CDT) task for a UE in positioning by referring to Creating an RNCTracing Task.Figure 11-2 shows an example of CDT tracing on the positioning based on CELLID+RTT.

Figure 11-2 Example of CDT tracing result

----End

11 Location Service ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

11-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 241: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

11.2.5 Elementary Procedures of Positioning Based on CELLID+RTT

This describes the elementary procedures of positioning based on CELLID+RTT in terms oftriggering conditions and signaling procedures in normal and abnormal conditions.

11.2.5.1 UE Measurement ProcedureThe UE measurement procedure is performed for the RNC to request a report of attributes fromthe UE.

11.2.5.2 RTT Measurement ProcedureDedicated for positioning, the RTT measurement procedure is performed by the NodeB tomeasure the Round Trip Time (RTT) for one or more cells.

UE Measurement Procedure

The UE measurement procedure is performed for the RNC to request a report of attributes fromthe UE.

Triggering Conditions

After receiving a LOCATION REPORTING CONTROL message from the CN, the RNCinitiates the UE measurement procedure for the location service.

Procedure

Figure 11-3 shows the UE measurement procedure.

Figure 11-3 UE measurement procedure

The procedure shown in Figure 11-3 is described as follows:

1. The SRNC sends a MEASUREMENT CONTROL message to the UE to request the UEto perform measurements based on the positioning method:l CELLID+RTT positioning method: UE Rx-Tx type 2 measurement (or UE Rx-Tx type

1 measurement, if the UE does not support the UE Rx-Tx type 2 measurement)

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 11 Location Service Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-5

Page 242: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

l OTDOA-IPDL positioning method: OTDOA type 2 measurements between thereference cell and the neighboring cells, and UE Rx-Tx type 2 measurement in thereference cell (if the UE is in CELL_DCH state)

l A-GPS positioning method: GPS pseudo-range measurement and Dopplermeasurement

2. The UE sends a response message to the SRNC.l If the measurements are successful, the UE sends a MEASUREMENT REPORT

message to report the measurement results.l If the UE does not support the measurement requested by the SRNC or if the

measurement results exceed the maximum number of criteria supported by the UE, theUE sends a MEASUREMENT CONTROL FAILURE message.

RTT Measurement ProcedureDedicated for positioning, the RTT measurement procedure is performed by the NodeB tomeasure the Round Trip Time (RTT) for one or more cells.

Triggering ConditionsAfter receiving a LOCATION REPORTING CONTROL message from the CN, the RNC startsto perform an RTT measurement for the cells in the active set or for the reference cell.

ProcedureFigure 11-4 shows the RTT measurement procedure.

Figure 11-4 RTT measurement procedure

The procedure shown in Figure 11-4 is described as follows:

1. The CRNC sends a DEDICATED MEASUREMENT INITIALIZATION REQUESTmessage to the NodeB to request the NodeB to perform an RTT measurement. Themeasurement object varies with the positioning method as follows:l CELLID+RTT positioning method: cells in the active set

l OTDOA-IPDL positioning method: reference cell

2. The NodeB sends a response message to the CRNC.

11 Location Service ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

11-6 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 243: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

l If the measurement is successful, the NodeB sends a DEDICATED MEASUREMENTINITIALIZATION REPONSE message to report the measurement results.

l If the measurement requested by the CRNC fails to be initialized, the NodeB sends aDEDICATED MEASUREMENT INITIALIZATION FAILURE message to informthe CRNC of the failure.

11.3 Positioning Based on OTDOA-IPDLWhen the OTDOA-IPDL positioning method is adopted, the location of a UE is identified basedon the arrival time differences of CPICH signals from three inter-NodeB cells to the UE, whichmeasures the differences.

11.3.1 Protocols Related to Positioning Based on OTDOA-IPDLThe procedure of positioning based on OTDOA-IPDL complies with some 3GPP TS22, TS23,and TS25 protocols.

11.3.2 Triggering Conditions of Positioning Based on OTDOA-IPDLThe CN initiates a positioning request and the RNC chooses the UE-assisted OTDOA-IPDLpositioning method.

11.3.3 Signaling Procedure of Successful Positioning Based on OTDOA-IPDLThis describes the signaling procedure of successful positioning based on OTDOA-IPDL. Forthe messages related to positioning failures, refer to the elementary procedures.

11.3.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Procedure of Positioning Based on CELLID+RTT orOTDOA-IPDLThe signaling tracing function of the RNC LMT can be used to trace the signaling procedure ofpositioning based on CELLID+RTT or OTDOA-IPDL.

11.3.5 Elementary Procedures of Positioning Based on OTDOA-IPDLThis describes the elementary procedures of positioning based on OTDOA-IPDL in terms oftriggering conditions and signaling procedures in normal and abnormal conditions.

11.3.1 Protocols Related to Positioning Based on OTDOA-IPDLThe procedure of positioning based on OTDOA-IPDL complies with some 3GPP TS22, TS23,and TS25 protocols.

The compliance protocols are as follows:l 3GPP TS22.071 "Location Services (LCS)"

l 3GPP TS23.271 "Functional stage 2 description of LCS"

l 3GPP TS25.305 "User Equipment (UE) positioning in Universal Terrestrial Radio AccessNetwork (UTRAN)"

l 3GPP TS25.331 "Radio Resource Control (RRC)"

l 3GPP TS25.413 "UTRAN Iu interface RANAP signalling"

l 3GPP TS25.433 "UTRAN Iub interface Node B Application Part (NBAP) signaling"

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 11 Location Service Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-7

Page 244: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

11.3.2 Triggering Conditions of Positioning Based on OTDOA-IPDL

The CN initiates a positioning request and the RNC chooses the UE-assisted OTDOA-IPDLpositioning method.

After receiving the positioning request from the CN, the RNC chooses the UE-assisted OTDOA-IPDL positioning method based on the factors such as the QoS of positioning, the positioningmethod configured on the RNC side, and the positioning capability of the UE.

11.3.3 Signaling Procedure of Successful Positioning Based onOTDOA-IPDL

This describes the signaling procedure of successful positioning based on OTDOA-IPDL. Forthe messages related to positioning failures, refer to the elementary procedures.

Figure 11-5 shows the signaling procedure of successful positioning based on OTDOA-IPDL.

Figure 11-5 Signaling procedure of successful positioning based on OTDOA-IPDL

Note the following information about the procedure shown in Figure 11-5:l The CN sends an authenticated LOCATION REPORTING CONTROL message to the

SRNC, and the SRNC chooses the UE-assisted OTDOA-IPDL positioning method.l If the UE is in CELL_DCH state, the SRNC performs the RTT measurement in the reference

cell.l The SRNC performs location calculation based on the known location of each cell, the

results of the OTDOA measurement, and the measurement results of the Relative TimeDifference (RTD) between the reference cell and the neighboring cells. Then, the SRNCreports the positioning results to the CN through a LOCATION REPORT message.

11.3.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Procedure of PositioningBased on CELLID+RTT or OTDOA-IPDL

The signaling tracing function of the RNC LMT can be used to trace the signaling procedure ofpositioning based on CELLID+RTT or OTDOA-IPDL.

11 Location Service ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

11-8 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 245: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Prerequisitel The RNC LMT works properly.

l You are logged in to the RNC as a user authorized to perform tracing management.

ContextTable 11-2 lists the messages to be traced.

Table 11-2 Messages to be traced

Interfaceand Protocolto Be Traced

Message Name on the LMT Message Name in Protocols

Uu

RRC_MEAS_CTRL MEASUREMENT CONTROL

RRC_MEAS_RPRT MEASUREMENT REPORT

RRC_MEAS_CTRL_FAIL MEASUREMENT CONTROLFAILURE

Iub

NBAP_DECIC_MEAS_INIT_REQ

DEDICATED MEASUREMENTINITIALIZATION REQUEST

NBAP_DECIC_MEAS_INIT_RSP

DEDICATED MEASUREMENTINITIALIZATION REPONSE

Iu

RANAP_LOCATION_REPORTING_CONTROL LOCATION REPORTING CONTROL

RANAP_LOCATION_REPORT LOCATION REPORT

ProcedureCreate a Call Data Tracing (CDT) task for a UE in positioning by referring to Creating an RNCTracing Task.Figure 11-6 shows an example of CDT tracing on the positioning based on CELLID+RTT.

Figure 11-6 Example of CDT tracing result

----End

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 11 Location Service Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-9

Page 246: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

11.3.5 Elementary Procedures of Positioning Based on OTDOA-IPDL

This describes the elementary procedures of positioning based on OTDOA-IPDL in terms oftriggering conditions and signaling procedures in normal and abnormal conditions.

11.3.5.1 UE Measurement ProcedureThe UE measurement procedure is performed for the RNC to request a report of attributes fromthe UE.

11.3.5.2 RTT Measurement ProcedureDedicated for positioning, the RTT measurement procedure is performed by the NodeB tomeasure the Round Trip Time (RTT) for one or more cells.

UE Measurement Procedure

The UE measurement procedure is performed for the RNC to request a report of attributes fromthe UE.

Triggering Conditions

After receiving a LOCATION REPORTING CONTROL message from the CN, the RNCinitiates the UE measurement procedure for the location service.

Procedure

Figure 11-7 shows the UE measurement procedure.

Figure 11-7 UE measurement procedure

The procedure shown in Figure 11-7 is described as follows:

1. The SRNC sends a MEASUREMENT CONTROL message to the UE to request the UEto perform measurements based on the positioning method:l CELLID+RTT positioning method: UE Rx-Tx type 2 measurement (or UE Rx-Tx type

1 measurement, if the UE does not support the UE Rx-Tx type 2 measurement)

11 Location Service ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

11-10 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 247: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

l OTDOA-IPDL positioning method: OTDOA type 2 measurements between thereference cell and the neighboring cells, and UE Rx-Tx type 2 measurement in thereference cell (if the UE is in CELL_DCH state)

l A-GPS positioning method: GPS pseudo-range measurement and Dopplermeasurement

2. The UE sends a response message to the SRNC.l If the measurements are successful, the UE sends a MEASUREMENT REPORT

message to report the measurement results.l If the UE does not support the measurement requested by the SRNC or if the

measurement results exceed the maximum number of criteria supported by the UE, theUE sends a MEASUREMENT CONTROL FAILURE message.

RTT Measurement ProcedureDedicated for positioning, the RTT measurement procedure is performed by the NodeB tomeasure the Round Trip Time (RTT) for one or more cells.

Triggering ConditionsAfter receiving a LOCATION REPORTING CONTROL message from the CN, the RNC startsto perform an RTT measurement for the cells in the active set or for the reference cell.

ProcedureFigure 11-8 shows the RTT measurement procedure.

Figure 11-8 RTT measurement procedure

The procedure shown in Figure 11-8 is described as follows:

1. The CRNC sends a DEDICATED MEASUREMENT INITIALIZATION REQUESTmessage to the NodeB to request the NodeB to perform an RTT measurement. Themeasurement object varies with the positioning method as follows:l CELLID+RTT positioning method: cells in the active set

l OTDOA-IPDL positioning method: reference cell

2. The NodeB sends a response message to the CRNC.

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 11 Location Service Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-11

Page 248: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

l If the measurement is successful, the NodeB sends a DEDICATED MEASUREMENTINITIALIZATION REPONSE message to report the measurement results.

l If the measurement requested by the CRNC fails to be initialized, the NodeB sends aDEDICATED MEASUREMENT INITIALIZATION FAILURE message to informthe CRNC of the failure.

11.4 Positioning Based on A-GPSWhen the A-GPS positioning method is adopted, the location of a UE is identified based on theGPS positioning-assistance data and GPS pseudo-range measurement results collected by theRNC.

11.4.1 Protocols Related to Positioning Based on A-GPSThe procedure of positioning based on A-GPS complies with some 3GPP TS22, TS23, and TS25protocols.

11.4.2 Triggering Conditions of Positioning Based on A-GPSThe CN initiates a positioning request and the RNC chooses the UE-assisted A-GPS positioningmethod.

11.4.3 Signaling Procedure of Successful Positioning Based on A-GPSThis describes the signaling procedure of successful positioning based on A-GPS. For themessages related to positioning failures, refer to the elementary procedures.

11.4.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Procedure of Positioning Based on A-GPSThe signaling tracing function of the RNC LMT can be used to trace the signaling procedure ofpositioning based on A-GPS.

11.4.5 Elementary Procedures of Positioning Based on A-GPSThis describes the elementary procedures of positioning based on A-GPS in terms of triggeringconditions and signaling procedures in normal and abnormal conditions.

11.4.1 Protocols Related to Positioning Based on A-GPSThe procedure of positioning based on A-GPS complies with some 3GPP TS22, TS23, and TS25protocols.

The compliance protocols are as follows:l 3GPP TS22.071 "Location Services (LCS)"

l 3GPP TS23.271 "Functional stage 2 description of LCS"

l 3GPP TS25.305 "User Equipment (UE) positioning in Universal Terrestrial Radio AccessNetwork (UTRAN)"

l 3GPP TS25.331 "Radio Resource Control (RRC)"

l 3GPP TS25.413 "UTRAN Iu interface RANAP signalling"

11.4.2 Triggering Conditions of Positioning Based on A-GPSThe CN initiates a positioning request and the RNC chooses the UE-assisted A-GPS positioningmethod.

After receiving the positioning request from the CN, the RNC chooses the UE-assisted A-GPSpositioning method based on the factors such as the QoS of positioning, the positioning methodconfigured on the RNC side, and the positioning capability of the UE.

11 Location Service ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

11-12 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 249: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

11.4.3 Signaling Procedure of Successful Positioning Based on A-GPS

This describes the signaling procedure of successful positioning based on A-GPS. For themessages related to positioning failures, refer to the elementary procedures.

Figure 11-9 shows the signaling procedure of successful positioning based on A-GPS.

Figure 11-9 Signaling procedure of successful positioning based on A-GPS

Note the following information about the procedure shown in Figure 11-9:

l The CN sends an authenticated LOCATION REPORTING CONTROL message to theSRNC, and the SRNC chooses the UE-assisted A-GPS positioning method.

l The SRNC calculates the 3-D location of each satellite that is involved in the positioning,according to the GPS satellite ephemeris. With the results of measurement based on A-GPS, the SRNC performs location calculation. Then, the SRNC reports the positioningresults to the CN through a LOCATION REPORT message.

11.4.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Procedure of PositioningBased on A-GPS

The signaling tracing function of the RNC LMT can be used to trace the signaling procedure ofpositioning based on A-GPS.

Prerequisitel The RNC LMT works properly.

l You are logged in to the RNC as a user authorized to perform tracing management.

Context

Table 11-3 lists the messages to be traced.

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 11 Location Service Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-13

Page 250: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

Table 11-3 Messages to be traced

Interfaceand Protocolto Be Traced

Message Name on the LMT Message Name in Protocols

Uu

RRC_MEAS_CTRL MEASUREMENT CONTROL

RRC_MEAS_RPRT MEASUREMENT REPORT

RRC_MEAS_CTRL_FAIL MEASUREMENT CONTROLFAILURE

Iu

RANAP_LOCATION_REPORTING_CONTROL LOCATION REPORTING CONTROL

RANAP_LOCATION_REPORT LOCATION REPORT

ProcedureCreate a Call Data Tracing (CDT) task for a UE in positioning by referring to Creating an RNCTracing Task.Figure 11-10 shows an example of CDT tracing result.

Figure 11-10 Example of CDT tracing result

----End

11.4.5 Elementary Procedures of Positioning Based on A-GPSThis describes the elementary procedures of positioning based on A-GPS in terms of triggeringconditions and signaling procedures in normal and abnormal conditions.

11.4.5.1 UE Measurement ProcedureThe UE measurement procedure is performed for the RNC to request a report of attributes fromthe UE.

UE Measurement ProcedureThe UE measurement procedure is performed for the RNC to request a report of attributes fromthe UE.

Triggering ConditionsAfter receiving a LOCATION REPORTING CONTROL message from the CN, the RNCinitiates the UE measurement procedure for the location service.

11 Location Service ProcedureRAN

Signalling Analysis Guide

11-14 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Page 251: RAN Signaling Analysis Guide(RAN11.0_01)

ProcedureFigure 11-11 shows the UE measurement procedure.

Figure 11-11 UE measurement procedure

The procedure shown in Figure 11-11 is described as follows:

1. The SRNC sends a MEASUREMENT CONTROL message to the UE to request the UEto perform measurements based on the positioning method:l CELLID+RTT positioning method: UE Rx-Tx type 2 measurement (or UE Rx-Tx type

1 measurement, if the UE does not support the UE Rx-Tx type 2 measurement)l OTDOA-IPDL positioning method: OTDOA type 2 measurements between the

reference cell and the neighboring cells, and UE Rx-Tx type 2 measurement in thereference cell (if the UE is in CELL_DCH state)

l A-GPS positioning method: GPS pseudo-range measurement and Dopplermeasurement

2. The UE sends a response message to the SRNC.l If the measurements are successful, the UE sends a MEASUREMENT REPORT

message to report the measurement results.l If the UE does not support the measurement requested by the SRNC or if the

measurement results exceed the maximum number of criteria supported by the UE, theUE sends a MEASUREMENT CONTROL FAILURE message.

RANSignalling Analysis Guide 11 Location Service Procedure

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-15